You are on page 1of 271

2006

nfhma-11.p65

1

5/6/2005, 9:50 AM

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION FUEL:
UNLEADED gasoline only Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:
Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehicle limited warranty.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY
US.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 17.7 (14.7, 67)

TIRE PRESSURE:
See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:
See pages 8-2 through 8-13.

QUICK INDEX
o o o o o o o o o Car will not start ....................................................................... 3-2 Flat tire ..................................................................................... 3-6 Warning light/chime comes on ................................... 1-52 ~ 1-55 Engine overheats ...................................................................... 3-4 Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-11 Starting the engine ................................................................... 2-4 Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) .......................... 1-3 Scheduled maintenance ............................................................ 5-4 Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-14

HOOD RELEASE:
Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:
API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuel efficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperatures are above 0°F (-18°C). See page 6-5 or 9-4.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:
HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil level should be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

Seoul Korea

Printing: MAY. 04, 2005 Publication No.: A3KO-EU55C Printed in Korea

nfhma-11.p65

2

5/6/2005, 9:50 AM

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER ADDRESS CITY DELIVERY DATE (Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser) DEALER NAME ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CODE DEALER NO. STATE ZIP CODE

nfhma-0.p65

2

4/28/2005, 9:00 AM

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE
o o o o o o o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warranty New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only) Anti-Perforation Limited Warranty Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicle California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable) Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicle Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:
Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

nfhma-0.p65

3

4/28/2005, 9:00 AM

OWNER'S MANUAL
A030A01NF-AAT

Operation Maintenance Specifications
A030A01NF-A

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out. This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

nfhma-0.p65

4

4/28/2005, 9:00 AM

For this reason.p65 5 4/28/2005. A080A01S-AAT TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. nfhma-0. we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U. safety or durability of your Hyundai and may. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance. in addition.S. 9:00 AM . Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.A070A01A-AAT ! CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way.

Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service. stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive Hyundais. Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company.p65 6 4/28/2005. please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. 9:00 AM . maintenance and any other assistance that may be required. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car. Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. A050A04A-AAT HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual. No part of this publication may be reproduced. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud. ! CAUTION: Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications.A040A01A-AAT FOREWORD Thank you for choosing Hyundai. Thank you. if you sell this Hyundai. nfhma-0. The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

Follow the advice provided with the caution.A090A01A-AAT SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING This manual includes information titled as WARNING.p65 7 4/28/2005. nfhma-0. CAUTION: This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning. serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. 9:00 AM . CAUTION and NOTE. These titles indicate the following: ! ! NOTE: WARNING: This indicates that a condition may result in harm. This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

9:00 AM . REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS INDEX nfhma-0.p65 8 4/28/2005.TABLE OF CONTENTS FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SECTION VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS CONSUMER INFORMATION.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (I) B250A01NF-AAT B250A01NF-A nfhma-0. 9:00 AM .p65 9 4/28/2005.

"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator 12.p65 10 4/28/2005. Ashtray 9.1. nfhma-0. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster. do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. Power Outlet 8.Digital Clock 11. 4. it may damage these parts. Cigarette Lighter 10. 9:00 AM . instrument panel or air ventilator). 3.Hazard Warning Switch ! CAUTION: When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Switch Power Adjustable Pedals Switch (If Installed) Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) Hood Release Lever Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (If Installed) Front Seat Warmer (If Installed) 7. 6. wash them with water immediately. 2. 5.

9:00 AM .INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (II) B250B01NF-AAT B250A02NF-A nfhma-0.p65 11 4/28/2005.

1. 6. do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. 13. 11. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas. it may damage these parts. 3. 10. 12. 5. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster. 15. 2. Audio System (If Installed) Passenger's Airbag Glove Box Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel Shift Lever Parking Brake Lever Drink Holder Center Console ! CAUTION: When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle.p65 12 4/28/2005. 8. 4. 7. Fuse Box Multi Box Instrument Cluster Multi-Function Light/Front Fog Light Switch Audio Remote Control Switch (If Installed) Horn and Driver's Airbag Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Cruise Control Switch 9. nfhma-0. instrument panel or air ventilator). wash them with water immediately. 16. 9:00 AM . 14.

9:00 AM .Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If Installed) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights (If Installed) Cruise Indicator Light Front Fog Light Indicator Light Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light Charging System Warning Light Cruise SET Indicator Light Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light Trunk Lid Open Warning Light * More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-52. nfhma-0.p65 13 4/28/2005.YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE B255A01NF-AAT INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SRS (Airbag) Warning Light Turn Signal Indicator Lights Seat Belt Reminder Light High Beam Indicator Light Door Ajar Warning Light Low Fuel Level Warning Light Check Engine .

They are designed and tested for the optimum safety. How can you tell if you are purchasing Hyundai Genuine Parts? Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below). counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty. To find the closest authorized dealer call 1-800-826-CARS A100A03L A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L nfhma-0. 9:01 AM .p65 14 4/28/2005. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized Hyundai Dealerships. 3. and reliability to our customers. counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by any Hyundai Warranty. Using imitation.A100A03A-AAT Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts 1. performance. Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the United States are packaged with labels written only in English. Why should you use genuine parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. 2. In addition. any damage to or failure of Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imitation.

.....................................1-58 Multi-Function Light Switch .................................................................................................................... 1-3 Door Locks .......................................................... 1-8 Windows .................1-70 Mirror ............................1-36 Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights .......................1-96 Stereo Sound System .............................................................................................................................. 1-11 Seats .........................................................................................1-28 Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ................1-21 Child Restraint System .......1-77 Homelink Mirror ..................1-64 Sunroof ....................................... 8:47 AM ......... 1-3 Keys ........... 1-79 Hood Release ..................................................................1-93 Heating and Cooling Control ...................................... 1-2 Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..........................................................1-50 Warning and Indicator Lights ................................................ 1-113 Audio System .................................................................................. 1-4 Theft-Alarm System ..........1-89 Cruise Control .............................................1-52 Trip Computer ............ 1-14 Seat Belts .....FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI Fuel Recommendations .................................................................................. 1-115 Antenna ........p65 1 4/28/2005................................................................... 1-130 1 1 nfhma-1a...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-61 Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ..........................................................................................................................................................

0% vol. the use of 100% unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuel containing MTBE over 15. Do Not Use Methanol Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your Hyundai. (Oxygen Content 2. UNLEADED FUEL ONLY ! CAUTION: B010C01A-AAT Use of MTBE B010A01NF-A Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher must be used in your Hyundai. Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15. otherwise " " light will illuminate.0% vol.) CAUTION: o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle shut off when refueling. (Oxygen Content 2.p65 2 4/28/2005.7% weight) may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting. should not be used.7% weight.0% vol. Fuels with unspecified quantities of alcohol. (Oxygen Content 2.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS B010A01NF-AAT B010B01A-AAT B010D01A-AAT Use Unleaded Gasoline What About Gasohol? Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be used in your Hyundai. ! Hyundai recommends that fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.7% weight) should not be used in your Hyundai. o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap clicks. if your engine develops driveability problems. or alcohols other than ethanol. However. 8:47 AM . nfhma-1a. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system.

which help prevent deposit formation in the engine. Hyundai recommends that you use gasolines treated with detergent additives. o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1. your Hyundai has two master keys and a sub key. NOTE: Before leaving your sub key with a parking attendant. However. o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time. o Use moderate acceleration. you can contribute to the economical operation and durability of your Hyundai by observing the following recommendations during the first 1. try to avoid hard stops. o Don't lug the engine (in other words.000 rpm. keep your engine speed (rpm. o Whether going fast or slow. or revolutions per minute) between 2.200 miles (2. The sub key will only function in the ignition and the door locks. trunk lid release. make sure that the lock knobs of the rear seatback lock and the trunk lid lock are switched to the "LOCK" position. Leaving your sub key with a parking attendant will ensure that your vehicle's trunk. During the First 1. vary your speed from time to time. o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h). o For the first 200 miles (300 km).200 Miles (2.200 miles (2. The master keys will open all locks on your vehicle. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. be sure to: o Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance. nfhma-1a. Sub key Master key B030A01NF For greater convenience.000 Km) No formal "break-in" procedure is required with your new Hyundai.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 3 BREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI B010E01A-AAT B020A01S-AAT KEYS B030A01NF-GAT Gasolines for Cleaner Air To help contribute to cleaner air. 8:47 AM . don't drive so slowly in too high a gear that the engine "bucks":shift to a lower gear). Don't start quickly or depress the accelerator pedal fully.000 rpm and 4.p65 3 4/28/2005.000 km) of operation. o While driving. o Determine that acceptable fuel is available. B010F01A-AAT Operation in Foreign Countries If you are going to drive your Hyundai in another country.000 km). glove box compartment and rear trunk access may not be unlocked in your absence.

always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. The light will go off approximately 10 seconds after closing the door or when the ignition switch is turned on. the ignition switch will be illuminated for your convenience. o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. or if you should lose your keys. not in the vehicle. The key number should also be recorded in a place where it can be found in an emergency. your authorized Hyundai dealer can make new keys if you can supply the key number. provided the ignition switch is not in the "ON" position. This helps ensure that the doors will not be opened accidentally. If you need additional keys. be sure that all the doors are securely closed and locked so that the doors cannot be opened from the inside. when combined with the proper use of seat belts. Also.p65 4 4/28/2005. o Before opening the door. locking the doors helps keep occupants from being ejected from the car in case of an accident. 8:47 AM .1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 4 B030B01NF-GAT B030C01JM-AAT DOOR LOCKS B040A01A-AAT Record Your Key Number ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH ! WARNING: B030B01NF B030C01E A code number is attached on the number tag that came with the keys to your Hyundai. nfhma-1a. Whenever either front door is opened. This key number tag should not be left with the keys but kept in a safe place. Before you drive away (especially if there are children in the car).

p65 5 4/28/2005. 8:47 AM . the red mark on the switch is not visible. The doors can be locked without a key. turn the key again toward the rear within 4 seconds. NOTE: o When the door is locked. close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended. To lock the doors from the outside. then close the door. NOTE: The driver's door can be unlocked by turning the key once toward the rear. o To discourage theft. so that the red mark on the switch is not visible. o The driver's and front passenger's doors can be opened by pulling the inside door handle even if the inside lock switch is pushed to the "LOCK" position. If you wish to unlock all doors.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 5 B040B01JM-AAT B040C02Y-AAT B040D01NF-AAT Locking. first push the inside lock switch to the "LOCK" position. This is normal. unlocking front doors with a key Locking from the Outside Locking from the Inside LOCK UNLOCK UNLOCK LOCK B040C01NF-A HNF2007 HNF2008 o The door can be locked or unlocked with a key. NOTE: o When locking the door this way. simply close the door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK" position. always remove the ignition key. be careful not to lock the door with the key left in the vehicle. o Lock the door by turning the key toward the front of the vehicle and unlock it by turning the key toward the rear. The passenger's side will lock or unlock all doors with just one rotation. nfhma-1a. The door will not lock if the key is left in the ignition switch when the front doors are closed. To lock the doors from the inside.

When the lock mechanism is engaged. all vehicle doors will unlock. the rear door cannot be opened from the inside. 8:47 AM . Move the lever to the " " position when normal door operation is desired. The central door locking switch is located on the driver's and front passenger's armrest.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 6 B040E04A-AAT B040G01NF-AAT ! Child-Protector Rear Door Lock WARNING: Central Door Locks Driver's side UNLOCK LOCK Be careful not to pull the inside door handle while driving. o When depressing the rear portion of these switches. Front passenger's side LOCK UNLOCK HNF2011-1 B040G01NF Your Hyundai is equipped with left and right side "child-protector" rear door locks. pull the outside door handle. nfhma-1a. To engage the child-protector feature so that the door cannot be opened from the inside. the door can be opened and you may be ejected from the vehicle and can be injured or killed. Its use is recommended whenever there are small children in the rear seat. move the child-protector lever to the " " position and close the door. If you pull the inside door handle. all vehicle doors will lock. If any door is open when the switch is depressed to the "LOCK" position. the door will remain locked when closed. To open the door from the outside. It is operated by depressing the door lock switch. NOTE: o When depressing the front portion of the driver's or front passenger's door lock switch.p65 6 4/28/2005.

press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter again within 4 seconds. Push the "LOCK ( )" button on the transmitter. Close all doors. Be careful not to pull the inside door handle while driving. If you pull the inside door handle. the door can be opened and you may be ejected from the vehicle and can be injured or killed. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. contact an authorized Hyundai dealer. ! WARNING: Unlocking doors 1. 2. including interference that may cause undesired operation.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 7 o The driver's and front passenger's doors can be opened by pulling the inside door handle even if the front portion of the driver's or front passenger's central door locking switch has been depressed to lock the doors. 8:47 AM . At the same time. B070F01NF-AAT KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. For further information. the driver's door unlocks and the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. all doors lock and the turn signal lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed. NOTE: If you wish to unlock all the doors. nfhma-1a. Locking doors 1. it will automatically lock all doors for driver and passenger's safety. Push the "UNLOCK ( )" button on the transmitter. 3. ! CAUTION: B040H02NF-GAT Speed Sensing Auto Door Locking (If Installed) When the speed of the vehicle keeps above the specific speed for 1 second. and (2) this device must accept any interference received. 2.p65 7 4/28/2005. Releasing the trunk lid Push the trunk lid release button ( ) on the transmitter for longer than 1 second. At the same time.

2) If this happens. 1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch. the second is the "Alarm" stage and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the turn signal lights.p65 8 4/28/2005. Lock Unlock Trunk Unlock The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the car is parked and the system is armed. To turn off the system. the turn signal lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the car. 8:47 AM . If triggered. the system will not be armed. unlock the door or trunk lid with the transmitter or the ignition key.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 8 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM B070A01A-AAT This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the car. nfhma-1a. Arm the system as described below. rearm the system as previously described. B070C01NF-AAT Alarm Stage NOTE: B070B01NF-AAT Armed Stage 1) If any door. 3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system. B070C01NF-A NOTE: Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the car. 3) The engine hood is opened. The alarming horn will sound and the turn signal lights will blink continuously for 27 seconds (This will repeat 3 times). After completion of the steps above. 2) The trunk lid is opened without using the transmitter or the ignition key. 1) A front or rear door is opened without using the transmitter or the ignition key. the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the car. 2) Make sure that the engine hood and trunk lid are closed and latched. trunk lid or engine hood remains open. This system is operated in three stages : the first is the "Armed" stage. B070B01NF-A Park the car and stop the engine.

3. nfhma-1a. and the LED will not light. Replace the battery as soon as possible. To turn off the system. If you wish to unlock all doors. trunk lid or engine hood is not opened or the ignition key is not inserted in the ignition switch within 30 seconds. 8:47 AM .FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 9 B070E01NF-AAT B070E01NF-GAT ! Panic Warning CAUTION: Replacing the battery When the transmitter's battery begins to get weak. push the "PANIC" button again on the backside of the transmitter. Only the driver's door is unlocked by depressing once the "UNLOCK ( )" button on the transmitter. If any door. the alarming horn will sound and the turn signal lights will blink continuously for 30 seconds. Carefully separate the case with a coin as shown in the illustration. B070E02NF-A 1. press the "UNLOCK ( )" button on the transmitter again within 4 seconds. B070D01NF-AAT Disarmed Stage The system will be disarmed by using the transmitter or the ignition key. the system will be rearmed. At the same time. Battery type : CR2032 Replacement instructions: Avoid trying to start the engine while the system is armed. the interior light will illuminate for 30 seconds. 2. Push the "PANIC" button on the backside of the transmitter. B070E01NF 1. the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.p65 9 4/28/2005. Whenever the step above is completed. NOTE: When the system is disarmed while the "DOOR" button of the interior light is depressed. it may take several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors.

p65 10 4/28/2005. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same(+side facing up). Remove the old battery from the case and note the polarity. 8:47 AM . nfhma-1a. then insert it in the transmitter.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 10 Battery HNF2005 2.

Window lock switch HNF2017-1 nfhma-1a. Rear passenger's door power window switch (left side) 4. Front passenger's door power window switch 3.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 11 WINDOWS B060D01NF-GAT 1.p65 11 4/28/2005. Rear passenger's door power window switch (right side) 5. Driver's door power window switch 2. 8:47 AM .

p65 12 4/28/2005. The windows may be opened by depressing the appropriate window switch and closed by pulling up the switch. press the window lock switch.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 12 B060A01NF-GAT POWER WINDOWS Auto Up/Down Window (Driver's side) The auto up/down window is controlled by the main switch on the driver's armrest. The window moves as long as the switch is operated.2 second. HNF2019-A The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation. nfhma-1a. 8:47 AM . Pull up the driver's window switch until the window is fully closed and continue pulling up the driver's window switch for at least 0. 2. press the window lock switch a second time. a window lock switch is provided on the armrest of the driver's door. To revert to normal operation. To fully close the window automatically. To disable the power windows. press the switch halfway down. press the switch fully down. The main switches are located on the driver's armrest and control the front and rear windows on both sides of the vehicle. the auto up/down window system must be reset as follows. To fully open the window automatically. the window will fully open or close even if you let go of the switch. 1. B060A01NF Window lock (Driver's side) Open Close NOTE: If the battery has been recharged or disconnected. Turn the ignition key to "ON" position. it may not operate properly. To open the window on the driver's side. pull the switch fully up. In automatic operation. If the auto up/down window is not reset. pull up or depress and release the switch to the opposite direction of the movement. In order to prevent operation of the passenger front and rear windows.

If the front doors are opened during this 30 second period. ! WARNING: ! Close Open WARNING: o Be careful that someone's head. o Do not leave children alone in the car. The window will then lower approximately 11. If this is done. HNF2018 o The automatic reverse window will only operate when the automatic up window operation feature is used. B060C01NF-AAT Automatic Reverse Window (Driver's side) If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body. the automatic reverse window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse direction. o Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposing directions at the same time. the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed. o If an object less than 0. 8:47 AM . Therefore. nfhma-1a. the power windows can no longer be operated without the ignition key turned to the "ON" position.8 in.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 13 NOTE: The power windows can be operated for 30 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" positions.p65 13 4/28/2005.(30cm) to allow the object to be cleared.16 in. hands and body are not trapped by a closing window. the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement. always check for any obstructions before raising any window.(4 mm) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper window channel. o Never leave the ignition key in the car. or removed from the ignition switch. The automatic reverse feature of the window will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.

then pull up on the recliner control lever at the outside edge of the seat. serious injury. release the recliner control lever. 8:47 AM . To recline the seatback. When you find the position you want.p65 14 4/28/2005. ! WARNING: To ensure the seat is locked securely. nfhma-1a. This could result in loss of control or an accident which may cause death. lean forward to take your weight off it. HNF2032 HNF2033 To move the seat toward the front or rear. attempt to move the seat forward or rearward without using the lock release lever. release the lever and slide the seat forward or rearward on its track until it locks into the desired position and cannot be moved further.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 14 SEATS B080A01A-AAT B080B02A-AAT B080C01A-AAT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward Adjusting Seatback Angle ! WARNING: Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This will release the seat on its track so you can move it forward or rearward to the desired position. Now lean back until the desired seatback angle is achieved. or property damage. To lock the seatback into position. pull the lock release lever upward.

o Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion. To raise the headrest. For this reason.p65 15 4/28/2005. 8:48 AM . both the driver and passenger seatbacks should always be in an upright position while the vehicle is in motion. nfhma-1a. Lock knob B080D01NF Headrests are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries. This should only be done when the seat is not occupied. The seat belt cannot provide full protection to an occupant if the seat back is reclined. push it down while pressing the lock knob. raise it as far as it can go then press the lock knob while pulling upward. To lower it. the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 15 B080D02JM-AAT ! Adjustable Headrests WARNING: ! WARNING: To minimize risk of severe injury in the event of a collision or a sudden stop. Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted. There is greater risk that the driver and passenger will slide under the seat belt which may result in serious injury if a crash occurs when the seatbacks are reclined. The protection provided by the seat belts and airbags may be reduced significantly when the seatbacks are reclined. To remove the headrest. pull it up. o Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed as injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. B080D01JM o For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height as the top of the occupant's eyes.

To decrease it. Maximum support nfhma-1a. pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it. To increase the amount of lumbar support. The active headrest is designed to move forward and upward during a rear impact. turn the handle on the outboard or left side of the seat. Minimum support 2. To adjust the headrest rearward. push the lever toward the rear. This helps to prevent the driver's and front passenger's head from moving backward and thus helps prevent neck injuries. 1. HNF2039 To adjust the lumbar support.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 16 B081D01LZ-AAT B083D01NF-AAT B080E01Y-AAT Tilting Headrest Forward and Rearward Active Headrests (If Installed) Lumbar Support Control (Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed) 1 2 B081D01NF HNF2041-1 The headrest may be tilted forward to three different positions by pulling the headrest forward. Adjust the headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck.p65 16 4/28/2005. pull the lever forward. 8:48 AM .

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag.p65 17 4/28/2005. Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward ! HNF2034 CAUTION: Do not operate two knobs at the same time. 8:48 AM . pedals and switches on the instrument panel. adjust the seat to the proper position so as to easily control the steering wheel. Pull the control knob forward or backward to move the seat forward or backward to the desired position. nfhma-1a. o Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. Before driving. raise or lower the control lever to the desired seat height. or property damage.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 17 B080F01NF-GAT B090A01Y-AAT B090B01NF-GAT Seat Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat Only) POWER DRIVER'S SEAT (If Installed) The driver's seat can be adjusted by using the control knobs on the left side of the seat. This could result in loss of control or an accident causing death. Release the control knob and the seat will remain at that position. serious injury. HNF2036 ! WARNING: To raise or lower the seat.

There is a greater risk that the seat occupants will slide under the belt resulting in serious injury if a crash occurs when the seatbacks are reclined. The seat belt cannot provide full protection to an occupant if the seatback is reclined. 8:48 AM . Pull the upper portion of the control knob forward or backward to recline the seatback to the desired position. Release the control knob and the seatback will remain in that position. both the driver's and passenger's seatback should remain in an upright position while the car is in motion. Move the rear portion of the control knob up or down to raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion. The protection provided by the seat belts and airbags may be reduced significantly when the seatbacks are reclined.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 18 B090C01Y-AAT B090D01NF-GAT Seat Cushion Height Adjustment Adjusting Seatback Angle ! WARNING: HNF2038 HNF2037 To minimize the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision or a sudden stop. Move the front portion of the control knob up or down to raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion. nfhma-1a.p65 18 4/28/2005.

o To unlock the seatback. With the ignition key in the "ON" position. o When you return the seatback to its upright position. During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed. NOTE: o The seat warmer may not operate if the ambient temperature is warm. ill people.p65 19 4/28/2005.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 19 B100A01NF-AAT B110A01NF-GAT SEAT WARMER (If Installed) ! FOLDING REAR SEATBACKS WARNING: Do not turn on the seat warmers.2°F (24°C). push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat. keep the switches in the "OFF" position. The seat warmers should not be turned on when children. the elderly. if the seat is occupied by someone who cannot monitor the temperature and turn off the seat warmer. B100A01NF B110A01NF-A The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. always be sure it has locked into position by pulling and pushing on the top of the seatback. o If the seat warmer doesn't operate when the ambient temperature is lower than 75. 8:48 AM . and sleeping people occupy the seat. if it becomes too warm. pull the seatback release lever. nfhma-1a. then pull forward on the seatback panel. it must be checked at an authorized dealer.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 20 B120A01NF-GAT ! REAR SEATBACK SAFETY LOCK WARNING: ! B140A01S-AAT The purpose of the folding rear seatbacks is to allow you to carry longer objects than could otherwise be accommodated. 8:48 AM . This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.p65 20 4/28/2005. move the lock knob to the "UNLOCK" position and fold the rear seatback. In this instance. do not place objects on the rear shelf as they may move forward during braking or in an accident and may strike and injure vehicle passengers. B140A01NF-A For the safety of all passengers. Do not allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback. nfhma-1a. luggage or other cargo should not be piled higher than the top of the seatback. while the car is moving as this is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. The rear seatback lock knob is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the trunk. In addition. Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seats. REAR SEAT WARNING B120A01NF-A If the rear seatback lock knob (located on the backside of the rear seatback) is in the "LOCK" position when the rear seatbacks are upright and closed. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops. it will not be possible to fold the rear seatback by using the seatback release lever.

Check belt fit periodically. If a larger child (over age 13) must be seated in the front seat. Children under the age of 13 should be restrained securely in the rear seat. B150D01A-AAT Pregnant Women The use of a seat belt is recommended for pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury in an accident. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. NOTE: Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. an unrestrained child can become a "missile" inside the car. not across the abdomen. including infants and children. follow the other instructions provided in this section. consult a physician. The lap portion should be fastened snug on the hips and as low as possible. For specific recommendations. Information about the use of these restraints begins on page 1-28.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 21 SEAT BELTS B150A01S-AAT B150C02A-AAT SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS ! Larger Children WARNING: Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. nfhma-1a. State laws require that some or all occupants of the vehicle use seat belts. In addition. 8:48 AM . the lap belt portion should be placed as low and snugly as possible on the hips. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat.p65 21 4/28/2005. The force required to hold a child on your lap could be so great that you could not hold the child. Every person in your vehicle needs to be properly restrained at all times. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. When a seat belt is used. make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. In a collision. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. The possibility of increased injury or severity of injury in an accident will be increased if this elementary safety precaution is not observed. See page 1-28. NEVER place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat. B150B03Y-AAT Infant or Small Child All 50 states have child restraint laws. Any child riding in the vehicle should always be in a proper restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle. The seat belts must be used in conjunction with the supplemental airbag system. ! WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Note that this vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System as discussed beginning on page 1-36. Before buying any child restraint system.

8:48 AM . you should consult a physician for recommendations. Instead. be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. See page 1-24. The shoulder belt can't do its job because it won't be against your body. In addition. nfhma-1a. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion. In a crash. When this is necessary. Even if you buckle up. not at your strong pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident. One Person Per Belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 22 B150E01A-AAT B160A01A-AAT Injured Person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front seat is in a reclined position. The belt forces would be applied there. receiving serious neck or other injuries. your seat belts can't do their job when you're reclined. have the seatback upright. B150G01A-AAT Do Not Lie Down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system. B150F01A-AAT ! CARE OF SEAT BELTS WARNING: Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. The lap belt can't do its job either. it will be in front of you. all passengers should be sitting up and the front seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving. B160B01A-AAT Periodic Inspection It is recommended that all seat belts be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Then sit back in the seat and wear your seat belt properly. you could go into it with great force. ! WARNING: When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after the rear seatback was folded down. Sitting in a reclined position or lying down when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.p65 22 4/28/2005. In a crash. the belt could go up over your abdomen. doors or other abuse. Parts of the system that are damaged should be replaced as soon as possible. Be sure that the webbing or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat. care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges.

This should be done even if no damage is visible. HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT SHOULDER BELT Release the button to lock the anchor into position. lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to your Hyundai Dealer. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor. strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric. ! WARNING: o The height adjuster must be in the locked position when the vehicle is moving. To lower it. o The misadjustment of height of the shoulder belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash. they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. nfhma-1a. dye. pull it up. Bleach. If belts become dirty. B160D01A-AAT When to Replace Seat Belts Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. you will not be getting the most effective protection. HNF2049 You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of 3 positions for maximum comfort and safety. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door and not your neck. 8:48 AM . push it down while pressing the height adjuster button. If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near your neck.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 23 B160C01A-AAT B170A01NF-GAT Keep Belts Clean and Dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. To raise the height adjuster.p65 23 4/28/2005.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 24 B180A01NF-AAT SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System with Emergency Locking Retractor To Fasten Your Belt NOTE: If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition key is turned from the "OFF" position to the "ON" or "START" position. 8:48 AM . When not securing a child restraint. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position. the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type).p65 24 4/28/2005. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. the belt will lock into position. See page 1-32. the seat belt warning light will blink and the warning chime will sound for approximately six seconds to remind the driver to fasten the driver's seat belt. When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system. NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle. the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract. easy motion. the belt will extend and let you move around. Hyundai strongly recommends that children always be seated in the rear seat. If there is a sudden stop or impact. nfhma-1a. but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. To fasten your seat belt. It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. B180A01NF To fasten your seat belt. B190A01NF-AAT SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and Rear Seat 3-Point System with Combination Locking Retractor To Fasten Your Belt Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. If you lean forward in a slow. pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. however.

o Children must always be seatbelted in the rear seats. If the belt webbing or hardware is damaged. as shown in the illustration. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. The automatic locking function is intended to facilitate child restraint installation. To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode. not on your waist. o The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over the shoulder nearest the door for the most effective protection. Rather. Be sure the belt webbing is straight and not twisted.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 25 NOTE: o Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes. Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. o Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract. B200A01NF ! WARNING: You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips. it is recommended that seated passengers use the emergency locking feature for improved convenience. Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door. replace it. nfhma-1a. one should be over and the other under. when the ignition key is turned from the "OFF" position to "the "ON" or "START" position. it could even cut into you. o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. 8:48 AM . o The front passenger's seat belt warning light on the center fascia panel blinks until the front passenger's seat belt is fastened to remind the front passenger to fasten the front passenger's seat belt. B200A01A-AAT ! Adjusting Your Seat Belt WARNING: o For maximum restraint system protection. Wearing the belt under the arm nearest the door could cause serious or fatal injuries in an accident. A twisted belt can't do its job as well. the seat belts must always be used whenever the car is moving.p65 25 4/28/2005. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist. it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision. o Seat belts are most effective when seatbacks are in the upright position. In a collision.

2. If this does not happen. B220A01NF-A 3. 1.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 26 B210A01A-AAT B200A01NF-AAT To Release the Seat Belt SEAT BELTS . check the belt to be sure it is not twisted. Pull the seat belt out of the rear seat package tray. then try again. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched. 8:48 AM .p65 26 4/28/2005. nfhma-1a. Before fastening the rear seat center belt. the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) are latched together.Rear Seat Center 3-Point System With Combination Locking Retractor B220A02NF-A B210A01NF The seat belt is released by pressing the release button in the locking buckle. pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (c) into the buckle (d). When it is released.

the belt will lock into position. o When using the rear seat center belt.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 27 ! WARNING: ! WARNING: B180A01NF-E There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks in the buckle. easy motion. If there is a sudden stop or impact. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If any metal tab or buckle is not locked. it will increase the chance of injury in the event of collision. the belt will extend and let you move around. 8:48 AM . It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. (2) If transporting an object on the rear seat may cause damage to the rear seat center belt. nfhma-1a. If you lean forward in a slow. B220A03NF-A o To disconnect the metal tab (a) from the buckle (b). you must lock all metal tabs and buckles. o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b) immediately after folding rear seatbacks up. insert a narrow-ended tool into the groove located on the buckle (b).p65 27 4/28/2005. (1) In case of folding rear seatbacks down. o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b) with the following exceptions.

store it in the trunk or fasten it with a safety belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident. ! WARNING: When fastening the outboard seat belts or the center seat belt. make sure they are inserted into the correct buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and assure proper operation. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system. Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. Thus only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle. even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident. press the button in the locking buckle.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 28 B220C02A-GAT CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM B230A03Y-AAT To Release the Seat Belt B220C02NF-A When you want to release the seat belt. Be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. All 50 states have child restraint laws. ! WARNING: o A child restraint system must be placed in the rear seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided. For small children and babies. a child seat or infant seat must be used. nfhma-1a. o When the child restraint system is not in use. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). and fits your child. children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat.p65 28 4/28/2005. o Children who are too large to be in a child restraint should sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. Before buying a particular child restraint system. 8:48 AM . Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy. According to accident statistics provided by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA). sudden stop or sudden maneuver. o A safety belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state.

Before purchasing a booster seat. o Never allow a child to be held in a person's arms while they are in a moving vehicle. it may not provide adequate security in an accident. Moving the child closer toward the seat belt buckle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. o Never use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback. o Always make sure that the shoulder belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt is positioned midway over the shoulder and never across the neck or behind the back. 8:48 AM . It is further required that the seat be placed in the vehicle's rear seat. o Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat. and as snug as possible. make sure that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and that it is satisfactory for use with this vehicle. the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. Your vehicle is provided with three child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat. o If the seat belt will not properly fit the child. even if the person holding the child is wearing a seat belt. Holding a child in a moving vehicle does not provide the child with any means of protection during an accident. Hyundai recommends the use of an approved booster seat in the rear seat in order to raise the child's seating height so that the seat belt will properly fit the child. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.p65 29 4/28/2005. nfhma-1a.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 29 B230B01NF-AAT ! WARNING: ! Using a Child Restraint System WARNING: For small children and babies. as this could result in serious injury to the child in the event of an accident or a sudden stop. The lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt must always be positioned as low as possible on the child's hips.

causing serious injury or death. The improper increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break. route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 30 B230C04A-AAT Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the "Tether Anchorage" System Three child restraint hook holders are located on the rear seat package tray. nfhma-1a. Rear seat package tray Child Restraint Hook Holders For vehicles with adjustable headrests.p65 30 4/28/2005. Front of Vehicle B230C02NF 2. 3. 8:48 AM . To install the child restraint seat ! WARNING: Do not mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a child restraint lower anchorage point. Tether Anchor Cover Child Restraint Hook Holder B230C01NF Tether Strap Hook 1. Route the child restraint seat tether strap over the seatback. Open the tether anchor cover on the rear seat package tray. otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat.

Their locations are shown in the illustration. The ISOFIX anchors are only provided for the left and right outboard rear seating positions. This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat for forward-facing child seats. o Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint. causing serious injury or death. o Do not mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a child restraint lower anchorage point. o Do not install a child restraint seat at the center of the rear seat using the vehicle's ISOFIX anchors.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 31 B230D03E-AAT Securing the Child Restraint Seat with the "ISOFIX" system ! ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator WARNING: ISOFIX Anchor B230D01NF Some child seat manufacturers make safety seats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIXcompatible child seats. The ISOFIX anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. In a crash.p65 31 4/28/2005. ISOFIX anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The improper increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break. B230D02NF-A The ISOFIX anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions. 8:48 AM . causing serious injury or death. There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for the center rear seating position. These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two ISOFIX anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child safety seat in the middle of the rear seat position to the ISOFIX anchors. o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seat only to the appropriate locations shown. B230D03NF-A nfhma-1a. the child seat ISOFIX attachments may not be strong enough to secure the child restraint seat properly in the center of the rear seat and may break.

pull more webbing toward the retractor.p65 32 4/28/2005. This will engage the seat belt retractor automatic locking feature. Once you have installed the ISOFIX child restraint seat. Install the child restraint system. If the retractor is in the Automatic Locking mode. double check to be sure that the retractor has engaged the Automatic Locking feature by trying to extend webbing out of the retractor. Also. Also try to tug the seat forward. assure that the seat is properly attached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors. test the safety seat before you place the child in it.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 32 Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attachments. the belt will be locked. the retractor will automatically revert back to its normal seated passenger Emergency Locking usage condition. On outboard rear seats To install a child restraint system in the rear seats. If you need to tighten the belt. which allows the seat belt to retract but not extend. After installation of the child restraint system. extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely from its retractor until a "click" is felt. B230G03Y-AAT Installation on Rear Seats On rear seat center position ! WARNING: B235G02NF-A If the child restraint seat is not anchored properly. 8:48 AM . try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed. buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to retract. the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases. Tilt the seat from side to side. Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is tight around the child restraint system and the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned so that it cannot interfere with the child's head or neck. B230G01NF-A nfhma-1a. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place. Also.

HXG229 Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The buckle pre- nfhma-1a. it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. together with the airbags. ! CAUTION: ! WARNING: Do not put anything near the buckle. where the frontal collision is severe enough. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated alone or. the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body. o If the seat belt does not operate as described. If the system senses excessive seat belt tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner activates. only use a child restraint system in the rear seat of your vehicle. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy. Placing objects near the buckle can adversely affect the buckle pre-tensioner and may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. B180B01NF-AAT Pre-tensioner Seat Belt tensioner (which is installed in the buckle) will also pull the seat belt into the buckle. the load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt. or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly.p65 33 4/28/2005. When the vehicle stops suddenly. have the system checked immediately by your authorized Hyundai dealer. In certain frontal collisions. The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 33 NOTE: o Before installing the child restraint system in any seating position. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer. 8:48 AM . the seat belt retractor will lock into position. Their locations are shown in the illustration: o If the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking mode. Therefore. o Do not install any child restraint system in the front passenger seat. the child restraint system can move when your vehicle turns or stops abruptly.

The seat belt must be worn correctly. or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven. which may appear to be smoke. this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS airbag. The pre-tensioners will not be activated if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision. nfhma-1a. please have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS airbag system as soon as possible. together with the airbags. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous. the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly. where the frontal collision is severe enough. The pretensioner seat belts can be activated alone or.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 34 Driver's airbag Passenger's airbag 1 NOTE: o Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated in certain frontal collisions. ! CAUTION: 3 2 4 B180B01NF 1. 8:48 AM . o When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated. or if it blinks for a second and remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds. o Although it is harmless. 3. the SRS airbag warnAIR ing light BAG on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition key has been turned to the "ON" position. and then it should turn off. may be visible in the passenger compartment. a loud noise may be heard and fine dust. 3.p65 34 4/28/2005. 4. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated. o Because the sensor that activates the SRS airbag is connected with the pretensioner seat belt. SRS airbag warning light Retractor pre-tensioner assembly SRS control module Buckle pre-tensioner assembly ! WARNING: To obtain maximum benefit from a pretensioner seat belt: 1. 2. 2. o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly. The seat belt must be adjusted to the correct position. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to "ON".

service or repair the pretensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury. This must be done by an authorized Hyundai dealer. 8:48 AM . o Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. All seat belts. o Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner. o Always wear the seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle. and failure to heed the warnings not to strike. After activation.p65 35 4/28/2005. o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. pretensioner seat belts must be replaced. replace. o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies. of any type.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 35 ! WARNING: o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies. should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision. modify. nfhma-1a. inspect. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated.

Driver's front airbag Passenger's front airbag Side impact airbag Curtain airbag HNF2052 nfhma-1a.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 36 ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS) B240D01NF-AAT 1. 8:48 AM . 2. 4. 3.p65 36 4/28/2005.

the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity. seating position and seat belt usage. The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 37 B240A01NF-AAT Driver's and Passenger's Front Airbag Driver's Front Airbag The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver's and front passenger's seat position. determine if the seats are fore or aft of a reference position. your Hyundai is equipped with an occupant classification system in the front passenger's seat. the SRSCM(SRS Control Module) controls the airbag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. According to the impact severity. or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts. have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the advanced SRS airbag system as soon as possible. The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. ! CAUTION: B240A01NF Your Hyundai is equipped with an advanced Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. how close the passenger's seat is to the instrument panel. 8:48 AM .p65 37 4/28/2005. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. Additionally. nfhma-1a. whether or not the seat belts are fastened. The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened. These sensors provide the ability to control the SRS deployment based on how close the driver's seat is to the steering wheel. which are installed on the seat track. For more detail. The occupant classification system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the front passenger's airbag under certain conditions. see "Occupant Classification System" later in this section. The driver's and front passenger's seat track position sensors. The indications of the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box. the SRS airbag warning light BAG on the instrument panel will illuminate because the SRS airbag warning light is connected with the seat track position sensor and the occupant classification system. If a seat track position sensor or an occupant classification system is not working AIR properly. The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the airbag inflation with two levels. and how severe the impact is. remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position.

o Ignoring the SRS airbag warning light can result in serious or fatal injury if the airbags. the SRS is designed to work with. Seat belts must be worn at all times. o Advanced airbags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. o Do not place any objects that may cause magnetic fields near the front seat. 8:48 AM . These may cause a malfunction of the seat track position sensor.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 38 ! WARNING: ! WARNING: ! WARNING: o Modification to the seat structure can adversely affect the seat track position sensor and cause the airbag to deploy at a different level than should be provided. your seat belts must be worn at all times. o The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle. nfhma-1a.p65 38 4/28/2005. o If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability. and be supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's three point seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Rear impact Side Impact Rollover B240A02NF o The driver should sit back as far as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. occupant classification system or pre-tensioners do not work properly. In addition. Additionally. it can cause death or serious injury when it inflates. The front airbags will not deploy in side. Therefore. o Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury if the front airbags inflate. o Do not place any objects underneath the front seats as they could damage the seat track position sensor or interfere with the occupant classification system. front airbags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold. o As its name implies. Always sit as far back from airbags as possible. rear-impact or rollover crashes. NOTE: o Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided on the backside of the sun visor and in the glove box. the airbags will only deploy once. o Front airbags are not intended to deploy in side-impact. rear or rollover impacts. please contact the Hyundai Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-633-5151. The airbags deploy only in certain frontal impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants. Have your car checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS airbag warning light alerts you to a potential problem. Front airbags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt. If you are sitting too close to the airbag.

Front Impact Sensor 2. 8:48 AM . centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on. the airbag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries. Knee Bolster 5.p65 39 4/28/2005. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Track Position Sensors 10. Doing so could result in injury. due to accidental deployment of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator (Front passenger's seat only) 3. o Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant classification system.Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Sensors/Buckle Pre-tensioner Assemblies nfhma-1a. o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system. B240B01NF The SRS consists of the following components: 1.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 39 B240B01NF-AAT ! WARNING: ! SRS Components and Functions WARNING: o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel. they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer. because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to deploy. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt. Passenger's Airbag Module 6. do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag while the vehicle is in motion. all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an airbag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. SRS "AIRBAG" warning light 4. All occupants should sit upright with the seat back in an upright position. o Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. Driver's Airbag Module 7. o If the airbags deploy. o For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes. o Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Occupant Classification System (Front passenger's seat only) 9. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an airbag deployment in case of an accident. make sure they are always properly belted and the seat is moved back as far as possible. legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the ignition key is removed. o The SRS airbag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. SRS Control Module (SRSCM) 8. instrument panel. If older children (teenagers and older) must ride in the front seat.

Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the airbags.p65 40 4/28/2005. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle. The SRS "AIRBAG" warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started. tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. The airbag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 40 11. slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion.Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies 13. B240B02L Upon deployment.Side Impact Airbag Module 14. after which the "AIRBAG" warning light should go out. After complete inflation. reducing the risk of head and chest injury.Side Impact Sensor 12. it will automatically deploy the front airbags. enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls. B240B03L A fully inflated airbag. the airbag immediately starts deflating.Curtain Airbag Module The SRSCM continually monitors all elements while the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal or near-frontal impact is severe enough to require airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment. B240B01L nfhma-1a. in combination with a properly worn seat belt. 8:48 AM .

) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's airbag. o When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle. o When the SRS is activated. turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position and remove the ignition key. the fine dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skin irritation. have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer. If this occurs. However. the SRS is not working properly.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 41 Passenger's Front Airbag panel or air ventilator). If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster. there may be a loud noise and fine dust will be released throughout the vehicle. etc. cassette holder. Passenger's Front Airbag ! WARNING: B240B04NF ! CAUTION: B240B05L o Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder. instrument ! WARNING: o The SRS can function only when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the SRS "AIRBAG" warning light does not illuminate.p65 41 4/28/2005. it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas. or continuously remains on after illuminating for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS "AIRBAG" warning light to illuminate. o Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous. NOTE: Your vehicle's Supplemental Restraint System Control Module is equipped a recording device which may record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and front passenger in certain collisions. 8:48 AM . Never remove or replace the airbag related fuse(s) when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. comes on while driving. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's airbag inflates. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the airbags were deployed. nfhma-1a. or after the engine is started. sticker. wash them with water immediately.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. in frontal crashes. Placing weight on the front passenger's seat or sitting out-of-correct position adversely affects occupant classification system operation. There is a malfunction On Off Activated in the system *1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. if necessary. The driver's front airbag is not affected or controlled by the Occupant Classification system. Adult*1 2. ! WARNING: Do not do any of the following.p65 42 4/28/2005. The Occupant Classification system is designed to detect the presence of a properlyseated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. nfhma-1a. Child*2 or Off On child restraint Deactivated system*3 Off On Deactivated 3. the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 42 B990A01NF-AAT OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system in the front passenger's seat. You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator on the center facia panel. 8:48 AM . Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system Condition SRS "Passenger Front detected by air bag off" warning passenger the occupant airbag classification indicator light light system Off Off Activated 1. centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on. the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture. *3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat. Unoccupied 4. and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position. the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator will be turned off and the front passenger's airbag will be able to inflate. This system detects the conditions 1~4 in the following table and activates or deactivates front passenger airbags based on these conditions. When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat. legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). B990A02NF-A If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system determines to be of adult size.

p65 43 4/28/2005.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 43 B990A08O B990A02O B990A07O o Put a heavy load in the front passenger seat. o Sit with hips shifted towards the front of the seat. nfhma-1a. .Sit on one side of the front passenger seat.Lean on the center console. 8:48 AM .Place feet on the dashboard. . B990A03O B990A05O o Excessively recline the front passenger seatback. .

! WARNING: ! B990A01O CAUTION: When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat. legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). have that person sit in the rear seat. remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven. the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator will not toggle. ask the passenger to move to the rear seat. o Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant classification system. Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position for about 30 seconds. After the vehicle starts. 8:48 AM . turn the ignition key to "LOCK" and ask the passenger to sit properly and restart the engine again. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front airbags will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passenger's seat. After the initial stage of about 30 seconds. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 44 Normal position NOTE: The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started. turn the ignition key to "LOCK" and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position. have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the occupant classification system and the SRS airbag system as soon as possible. the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator will not change according to the passenger's posture. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. If there is a malfunction of the occupant classification system. do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat. if the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is on. centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on. o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position. If the front passenger seat is occupied. nfhma-1a.p65 44 4/28/2005. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on. the SRS airbag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate because the passenger's front airbags are connected with the occupant classification system. the occupant classification sensor will then classify the front passenger within approximately 10 seconds after the ignition is turned on. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on. disabling or enabling the passenger airbags. Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger airbag. the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may be turned on or off for a few seconds. legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). o If you change the weight on the front passenger seat just after sit-in or restart of the engine. If the occupant classification system is not working properly.

o Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear. speed and point of impact. centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on.p65 45 4/28/2005. This condition can result in an adult potentially being misclassified and illumination of the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 45 B990B04Y-AAT ! WARNING: ! Side Impact Airbag (If installed) WARNING: o Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat. o A smaller-stature adult who is not seated correctly (for example: seat excessively reclined. o Do not sit on sharp objects such as tools when occupying the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant classification system. nfhma-1a. 8:48 AM . a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. leaning on the center console. B990B02LZ Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact airbag in each front seat. angle. It is recommended that child restraints be secured in a rear seat. or hips shifted forward in the seat) can cause a condition where the advanced frontal airbag system senses less weight than if the occupant were seated properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position. Don't place anything on or attach anything such as a blanket or after market seat heater to the front passenger seat. The side impact airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. as opposed to the front seat. legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone. The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions. depending on the crash severity. This can adversely affect the occupant classification system. o Do not use accessory seat covers on the front seats.

etc. o Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. nfhma-1a. o Do not place any objects (an umbrella. o For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag.p65 46 4/28/2005. o Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side impact airbag inflates. bag. 8:48 AM . o Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system. o To prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact airbag that may result in personal injury.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 46 ! WARNING: ! WARNING: Side impact sensor B990B01NF ! WARNING: o The side impact airbag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps. o Do not use excessive force on the side of the seat. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. avoid impact to the side impact sensor when the ignition key is on. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants. o Do not use any accessory seat covers.) between the front door and the front seat.

and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. 8:48 AM . installing. collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in most rollover situations. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. or any work on the steering wheel must be performed by a qualified Hyundai technician. The infant or child could be severely injured by an airbag deployment in case of an accident. The curtain airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions. have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer. repairing. such as removing. use only a soft. dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel. o Modification to SRS components or wiring. can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury. o For cleaning the airbag pad covers. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system. speed and impact. Any work on the SRS system. depending on the crash severity.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 47 B990C01LZ-GAT B240C01NF-AAT Curtain Airbag Curtain Airbag SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and so there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to inflate.p65 47 4/28/2005. or continuously remains on. HLZ2051 ! WARNING: Curtain airbags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors. including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure. If the SRS "AIRBAG" warning light does not illuminate. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. angle. nfhma-1a. HSM393 o Do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. instrument panel. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrain one occupant.p65 48 4/28/2005. or out of the vehicle. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury. you shouldn't try to start the engine. o Do not modify the front seats. 8:48 AM . nfhma-1a. have the car towed to an authorized Hyundai dealer. o Do not attach or place objects on or near the airbag covers. they could be injured if the airbags inflate. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side impact airbags. against other occupants. o Do not place items under the front seats. If more than one person uses the same seat belt. o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring. o If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on flooring. Any object attached to or placed on the front or side impact airbag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags. fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle. o Keep occupants away from the airbag covers. or other components of the SRS system. due to accidental inflation of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 48 B240D01NF-AAT ! Additional Safety Precautions WARNING: o Never let passengers ride in the cargo area (trunk) or on top of a folded-down back seat. o Passengers should not place hard or sharp objects between themselves and the airbags. If occupants are too close to the airbag covers. All occupants should sit upright. o If the airbags inflate. or if the vehicle must be scrapped. they could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. o Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. Doing so could result in injury. Your Hyundai dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or in your mouth can result in injuries if an airbag inflates. All occupants should sit upright. certain safety precautions must be observed. o Do not use any accessories on seat belts. make certain that this manual is transferred to the new owner. o If components of the airbag system must be discarded. o If you sell your vehicle. they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer. fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor.

this may affect the operation of your vehicle's airbag system.p65 49 4/28/2005. 8:48 AM . If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame. Adding Equipment to or Modifying Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle. centered on the seat cushion with your seat belt on.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 49 o Never hold an infant or child on your lap. bumper system. The infant or child could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a crash. nfhma-1a. ! WARNING: o Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash. o Always sit upright with the seatback in an upright position. front end or side sheet metal or ride height. legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 50 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS B260A01NF-AAT B260B01NF-A nfhma-1a.p65 50 4/28/2005. 8:48 AM .

4. 20. 23. 22. 8. 19. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Charging System Warning Light Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light Check Engine . 18. 6.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) SRS (Airbag) Warning Light Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If Installed) Odometer/ Trip Odometer/ Trip Computer (If Installed) CRUISE Indicator Light Cruise SET Indicator Light Trunk Lid Open Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light nfhma-1a. 5. 21. 11. 13. 14.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 51 1. 8:48 AM . 10. 16. 3. 2. 9. 15. 17. 7.p65 51 4/28/2005. Tachometer Door Ajar Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's side) High Beam Indicator Light Turn Signal Indicator Lights Speedometer Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights (If Installed) Front Fog Light Indicator Light ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed) Coolant Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge 12.

there is a serious malfunction. Turn Signal Indicator Lights B260A01Y-GAT Front Fog Light Indicator Light The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light ! CAUTION: B260F01A-AAT High Beam Indicator Light The high beam indicator light comes on whenever the headlights are switched to the high beam or flash position. If the oil level is low.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 52 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS B260B01JM-AAT B260E01NF-AAT B260G01A-AAT SRS (Airbag) Warning Light The SRS warning light comes on for about 6 seconds after the key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started. turn the engine off immediately. If this happens. Your dealer should be consulted for repairs. then go out when the engine is started. after which it will go out. a malfunction in the turn signal system is indicated. or continuously remains on after operating for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the "ON" position or started the engine. turn off the engine and check the oil level. This fog indicator light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position and the front fog light switch is on. If the low oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running. If the light stays on with the engine running. This light also comes on when the SRS is not working properly. If the AIRBAG warning light does not come on.p65 52 4/28/2005. or if it comes on while driving. it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on. serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. blinks more rapidly than normal. If the arrow comes on but does not blink. the engine should be checked by a Hyundai dealer before the car is driven again. nfhma-1a. or does not illuminate at all. 8:48 AM . If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running. stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so. fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. In normal operation. have the SRS inspected by an authorized Hyundai dealer. B260D01A-AAT Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime (Driver's side) The driver's seat belt reminder light blinks and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned from the "OFF" position to the "ON" or "START" position to remind the driver to fasten the driver's seat belt.

make certain the generator drive belt is in place. If the light comes on at any other time. B260J02A-AAT Charging System Warning Light The charging system warning light should come on when the ignition is turned on. If the brakes fail while you are driving. the light should go out when the parking brake is released. more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the car. stop. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail. Have the system checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so. the car should be immediately and carefully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection. check the tension of the belt.p65 53 4/28/2005. turn off the engine and check under the hood. you should slow the vehicle and bring it to a complete stop in a safe location off the roadway. there is a malfunction in the electrical charging system. After adding fluid. the warning light should come on when the ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START". If further trouble is experienced. Also. the car will not stop in as short a distance with only half of the brake system working. B260K01S-AAT Trunk Lid Open Warning Light This light remains on unless the trunk lid is completely closed and latched. 8:48 AM . Driving your car with a problem in either the brake electrical system or brake hydraulic system is dangerous. If the light stays on while the engine is running. then go out when the engine is running. After the engine is started. Warning Light Operation The parking brake/brake fluid level warning light should come on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START". then go out when the engine starts. The brake fluid level warning light indicates that the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder is low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be added. nfhma-1a. have your brakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. If the parking brake is not applied.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 53 B260H02A-AAT Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light ! WARNING: If you suspect brake trouble. If it is. the vehicle should not be driven at all but taken to a dealer by a professional towing service or some other safe method. and could result in a serious injury or death. Do this as shown on page 6-19 by pushing down on the center of the belt. Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. First. if no other trouble is found. With only one of the dual systems working. If the light comes on while you are driving.

The normal braking system will still be operational. (Electronic Brake Force Distribution). and will go out in a few seconds after the engine is started. If this occurs. If this occurs. have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. When it comes on.B. This light will also illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. avoid sudden stops and have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Check Engine . take your car to your nearest authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. but should go out after three seconds. If the ABS SRI remains on. ! WARNING: NOTE : The warning chime only sounds whenever the key is in the ignition switch and the driver's side front door is open simultaneously.p65 54 4/28/2005. nfhma-1a. but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system. or does not come on when the key is turned to the "ON" position. and the system is not functioning properly so that the exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter. See section 2 for more information about the ESC. If it illuminates while driving. If the ESC or ESC-OFF indicator stays on. 8:48 AM . you should add fuel as soon as possible. there may be a problem with E. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights (If Installed) The electronic stability control indicators change operation according to the ignition switch position and whether the system is in operation or not. They will illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. B265C01NF-AAT B260M01A-AAT B260P02Y-GAT Low Fuel Level Warning Light The low fuel level warning light comes on when the fuel tank is approaching empty. this indicates that there may be a problem with the ABS. or does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. comes on while driving. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed) When the key is turned to the "ON" position.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) This light illuminates when there is a malfunction of an exhaust gas related component. the Anti-Lock Brake System indicator will come on and then go off in a few seconds.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 54 B260L02HP-GAT B260N02A-AAT Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime The door ajar warning light warns you that a door is not completely closed and the chime warns you that the key is in the ignition switch. If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/ Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON" or come on while driving.D. The chime sounds until the key is removed from the ignition switch or the driver's side front door is closed.

Excessive rotor damage will result if the worn pads are not replaced. refer to "To cancel the cruise speed" on page 1-94. NOTE: The " " symbol means. add washer fluid at your earliest opportunity. nfhma-1a. B280A01NF The needle on the gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacity is given in section 9.p65 55 4/28/2005. 8:48 AM . FUEL GAUGE B270A01O-AAT BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND B260R01NF-GAT Cruise SET Indicator Light The Cruise SET indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control "COAST/SET" or "RES/ACCEL" switch is pushed. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light The low windshield washer fluid warning light comes on when the washer fluid reservoir is approaching empty. It may also be heard when the brake pedal is pushed down firmly. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving. The front and rear disc brake pads have wear indicators that should make a high-pitched squealing or scraping noise when new pads are needed. The Cruise SET indicator light does not illuminate when the cruise control "CANCEL" switch is pushed or the system is disengaged. The indicator light turns off when the cruise control ON/OFF button is pushed again.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 55 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER B260Q01NF-GAT B260S01NF-GAT B280A01NF-AAT CRUISE Indicator Light The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON/ OFF button on the steering wheel is pushed. the fuel filler lid is located on the left side of the vehicle. See your Hyundai dealer immediately. Information about the use of cruise control begins on page 1-93. When it comes on. To disengage the cruise control system.

B330A03A-AAT TACHOMETER Red Zone B330A01NF B290A01NF The tachometer registers the speed of your engine in revolutions per minute (rpm). after the engine has cooled. nfhma-1a. check the coolant level (See "If the engine overheats" on the page 3-4. 8:48 AM . ! CAUTION: The engine should not be raced to such a speed that the needle enters the red zone on the tachometer face.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 56 B290A03A-AAT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The normal range is approximately in the middle between "H" and "C". This can cause severe engine damage and may void your warranty coverage.p65 56 4/28/2005. If it moves across the dial to "H" (HOT).) and the water pump drive belt. If you suspect cooling system trouble. The engine coolant is under pressure and could erupt and cause severe burns. have your cooling system checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir. ! WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. pull over and stop as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Then open the hood and.

p65 57 4/28/2005. Trip Odometer (Without Trip Computer) With Manual Transaxle B300A02NF-A B310B01NF-A 3. NOTE: Federal law forbids alteration of the odometer of any vehicle with the intent to change the mileage registered on the odometer.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 57 B300A01A-AAT B310B01NF-AAT SPEEDOMETER 2. 8:48 AM . You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.4L ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER With Automatic Transaxle 2.3L 1. nfhma-1a. B400B01NF-A Pushing in the TRIP switch behind the left side of the steering wheel when the ignition switch is turned "ON" will display two trip odometers in miles. B300A01NF-A Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated in miles per hour or kilometers per hour. Odometer The odometer records the total distance traveled in miles. The alteration may void your warranty coverage.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 58 With Automatic Transaxle To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B. TRIP A: TRIP B: First distance you have traveled from your origination point to a first destination. average speed. average fuel consumption and distance to empty on the LCD. the trip odometer will reset to 0. B310B04NF-A nfhma-1a. 8:48 AM . press the TRIP switch. such as estimated tripmeter. When the RESET switch is pressed for 1 second. Second distance from the first destination to the final destination. drive time. TRIP COMPUTER B400B01NF-AAT (With Automatic Transaxle)(If Installed) B310B03NF-A With Manual Transaxle B400B08NF-A B310B02NF-A The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge that displays information related to driving.p65 58 4/28/2005.

8:48 AM . o Pressing the RESET switch for more than 1 second.p65 59 4/28/2005. when the tripmeter is being displayed. o The meter's working range is from 0 to 999. average fuel consumption and drive time. Tripmeter (Miles) Tripmeter Odometer B400B01NF-A B310B02NF-A B400B03NF-A Pushing in the TRIP switch when the ignition switch is in "ON" position changes the display as follows. average speed.9 miles. o This mode indicates the total distance travelled since the last tripmeter reset. TRIPMETER DRIVE TIME AVERAGE SPEED AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION DISTANCE TO EMPTY Push in the RESET switch more than 1 second to initialize the displayed information such as tripmeter.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 59 TRIP SWITCH RESET SWITCH 1. Total distance is also reset to zero if the battery is disconnected. clears the tripmeter to zero. nfhma-1a.

p65 60 4/28/2005. press the RESET switch for more than 1 second. o To reset the average speed to zero (---). o Average speed is reset to zero if the battery is disconnected. o When you drive 0. Drive Time Drive time 3.5 mile and less after resetting. o The drive time will be initialized to '0:00' after being displayed to '99:59'. press the RESET switch for more than 1 second. 8:48 AM . the average fuel consumption will be displayed to '--'. Average Fuel Consumption (MPG) Average fuel consumption Odometer B400B04NF-A Odometer B400B05NF-A Odometer HNF2084-A o This mode indicates the total time from the starting of the engine to the ignition key "OFF" after resetting. When the RESET switch is pushed. o This mode indicates the average speed from the starting of the engine to the ignition key "OFF". the average speed will be displayed to '---'.5 mile and less after resetting. o This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last average consumption reset. nfhma-1a. o When you drive 0. o To reset the average fuel consumption to zero (--). o Average fuel consumption is reset to zero if the battery is disconnected.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 60 2. o The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input. it will be initialized to '0:00'. Average Speed (MPH) Average speed 4.

nfhma-1a. 8:48 AM . or does not go on at all. Odometer B400B06NF-A B400B07NF-A o This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty from the current fuel level in the fuel tank. the distance to empty digits (---) will blink until more fuel is added.p65 61 4/28/2005. Distance to Empty (Miles) Distance to empty Distance to empty letter B340A01A-AAT COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL. Check for a burnedout fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer. NOTE: o The distance to empty can differ from the actual tripmeter according to driving conditions. Pushing upwards on the lever causes the turn signals on the right side of the car to blink. o When the distance to empty is less than 30 miles (50 km). As the turn is completed. If either turn signal indicator light blinks more rapidly than usual. o The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 1.36 gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle. the lever will automatically return to the center position and turn off the turn signals at the same time. o The distance to empty can vary according to the driving conditions.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 61 MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH 5. there is a malfunction in the system. driving pattern or vehicle speed. goes on but does not blink. HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM SWITCH Turn Signal Operation Pulling down on the lever causes the turn signals on the left side of the car to blink.

p65 62 4/28/2005. push the lever forward (away from you). The High Beam Indicator Light will come on at the same time. To operate the headlights. NOTE: The ignition must be in the "ON" position to turn on the headlights. For low beams. To turn on the headlight high beams. To turn them "ON" again. the parking lights will automatically shut "OFF" when the driver's door is opened. The first position turns on the parking lights. 8:49 AM . tail lights and instrument panel lights. you must simply turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. The second position turns on the headlights. pull the lever back toward you.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 62 B340B01A-AAT B340C03A-AAT B340D01A-AAT Lane Change Signal Headlight Switch High-beam Switch B340B01NF B340C01NF B340D01NF To indicate a lane change. move the lever up or down to a point where it begins flashing. Parking Light Auto Off If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" after driving. turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. nfhma-1a. sidelights. The lever will automatically return to the center position when released.

If you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO". The headlights can be flashed even though the headlight switch is in the "OFF" position. 8:49 AM . the tail lights and headlights will be turned automatically on or off according to external illumination conditions. then release it. To flash the headlights. pull the switch lever toward you. To operate the automatic light feature. o If your vehicle has window tint or other types of coating on the windshield. turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch.p65 63 4/28/2005. cloudy and rainy conditions. NOTE: Turn the lights manually in foggy. o Don't clean the sensor using a window cleaner.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 63 B340E01A-AAT B340G01LZ-AAT Headlight Flasher Auto Light (If Installed) Auto light sensor B340G02NF-A B340E01NF HNF2094 NOTE: o Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better auto light system control. nfhma-1a. the AUTO light system may not work properly.

Intermittent wiper operation 2. When the washer lever is operated. They will light when the headlight switch is in the second position. do not attempt to wipe away heavy accumulations of snow or ice. Low-speed operation 3. o In icy or freezing weather. the wipers automatically make two passes across the windshield. pull the wiper/ washer lever toward the steering wheel. the front fog lights will be turned off. be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass prior to operating the wipers. Accumulated snow and ice should be removed manually. place the switch in the "ON" position. To use the windshield washer. If there is only a light layer of snow or ice.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 64 FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH B360B01L-AAT WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH B350A01A-AAT B350B01O-GAT Windshield Washer Operation (1) (2) (3) B360B02NF HNF2101-A To turn on the front fog lights. nfhma-1a. High-speed operation HNF2103-A NOTE: If you turn on the headlight high beams. NOTE: To prevent damage to the wiper system. use windshield washer antifreeze. The washer continues to operate until the lever is released.p65 64 4/28/2005. operate the heater in the defrost mode to melt the snow or ice before using the wiper. The windshield wiper switch has three positions: 1. 8:49 AM . NOTE: o Do not operate the washer more than 15 seconds at a time or when the fluid reservoir is empty. o In areas where water freezes in winter.

The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. push the switch a second time.p65 65 4/28/2005. always pull off the road as far as possible. To use the intermittent wiper feature.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 65 HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM Mist Wiper Operation B350C01NF-AAT B370A01A-AAT Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation HNF2104-A B370A01NF-A HNF2102-A If a single wipe is desired to clear mist. push the windshield wiper and washer control lever upwards. When you must make such an emergency stop. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition. nfhma-1a. place the wiper switch in the "INT" position. the interval between wipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18 seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel. This causes all turn signal lights to blink. To turn the hazard warning lights off. 8:49 AM . With the switch in this position. The hazard warning system should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the car in a hazardous location.

With Automatic A/C NOTE: The ignition must be in the "ON" position for the rear window defroster to operate.Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to facilitate resetting the clock to the correct time. Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 11 : 59 changes the readout to 12 : 00. M . B400A01NF-A There are three control buttons for the digital clock.Push "H" to advance the hour indicated. HNF2113-A The rear window defroster switch also activates the outside rearview mirror heaters. Push the "R" button for 5 seconds to display a 12 or 24-hour clock. nfhma-1a.Push "M" to advance the minute indicated. 8:49 AM . Their functions are: H .1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 66 REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH B380A01HP-AAT DIGITAL CLOCK B400A01NF-GAT With Manual A/C ! CAUTION: Do not clean the inner side of the rear window glass with an abrasive type of glass cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign deposits from the inner surface of the glass as this may cause damage to the defroster elements. R . To turn the defroster off. The rear window defroster and heated outside rearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in the switch. When this is done: Pressing "R" between 11 : 01 and 11 : 29 changes the readout to 11 : 00. To restart the defroster cycle.p65 66 4/28/2005. push in the switch again after it has turned itself off. push the switch a second time. The rear window defroster automatically turns itself off after about 20 minutes.

the key must be in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.p65 67 4/28/2005. ! CAUTION: Do not use electric accessories or equipment other than the Hyundai genuine parts in the socket. push it all the way into its socket. Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. When the element has heated. 8:49 AM . To use the cigarette lighter. use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or its approved equivalent. For the cigarette lighter to work. If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter. These supply 12V electric power to operate electric accessories or equipment only when the key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position. the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position. The power outlets are located on the center fascia panel and in the trunk.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 67 INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT CONTROL (RHEOSTAT) B410A01A-AAT CIGARETTE LIGHTER B420A02A-AAT POWER OUTLETS B500D01NF-AAT B410A01NF-A B420A01NF HNF2182 The instrument panel lights can be made brighter or dimmer by turning the instrument panel light control knob. nfhma-1a. This can damage the heating element and create a fire hazard.

Using the power outlets when the engine stops or keeping the electric device plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to discharge. the plastic receptacle should be removed by lifting the plastic ash receptacle upward and pulling it out.p65 68 4/28/2005. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle. o Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12 volts. nfhma-1a. The drink holder can be used by lifting its cover. o Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. 8:49 AM . HNF2184 The drink holder for holding cups or cans is located on the main console. B430A01NF The front ashtray may be opened by pushing and releasing the ashtray lid.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 68 ASHTRAY B430A02NF-GAT DRINK HOLDER B450A01NF-GAT ! Front Drink Holder CAUTION: o Use the power outlets only when the engine is running and remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. The ashtray light will only illuminate when the external lights are on. To clean ashtray.

Shopping bag holder is located on the left side of the glove box. It may cause damage to the shopping bag holder.p65 69 4/28/2005. Spilled liquids can damage interior trim and electrical components. HNF2179 HNF2185 The rear drink holder for holding cups or cans is located in the center of the rear seat armrest. nfhma-1a. possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle. These objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 69 SHOPPING BAG HOLDER B450B01NF-GAT B540A01NF-AAT Rear Drink Holder ! WARNING: o Use caution when using the drink holders. ! ! CAUTION: CAUTION: Place the drink holder in its closed position while not in use. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure you or your passengers. Do not hang a bag beyond 7lbs (3 kg). o Do not place objects other than cups or cans in the drink holder. 8:49 AM .

nfhma-1a. or property damage. closed.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 70 SEATBACK POCKET B540B01E-GAT SUNROOF B460A02Y-AAT B460B01NF-GAT (If Installed) Sun Shade Opening the Sunroof System HNF2042 The seatback pockets for holding papers are located on the backside of the front seats. serious injury. The sunroof can only be opened.p65 70 4/28/2005. or to block sunlight. or tilted when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control buttons located on the overhead console. ! If your vehicle is equipped with this feature. 8:49 AM . WARNING: Never adjust the sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death. HNF2026 B460A01NF Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sunshade which you can manually adjust to let in light with the sunroof closed.

p65 71 4/28/2005. Manual tilt open Press the TILT UP ( ) button on the overhead console for less than 0. o Do not place your head or arms out of the sunroof opening at any time. 8:49 AM . The sunroof will slide all the way open. nfhma-1a. Auto tilt open To use the auto tilt feature. NOTE: After washing the car or after there is rain. be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it. arms or body are between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash. as this could result in injury. ! HNF2027 WARNING: Close Auto slide close To close the sunroof. press any sunroof control button. Manual slide close Press the TILT UP( ) button on the overhead console for less than 0.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 71 Sliding the sunroof Auto slide open To use the auto slide feature.5 second.5 second. momentarily (more than 1 second) press the SLIDE OPEN ( ) button on the overhead console. momentarily (more than 1 second) press the TILT UP ( ) button on the overhead console. press any sunroof control button. To stop at the desired point. o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands. press the TILT UP ( ) button on the overhead console for more than 1 second. To stop the sunroof tilting at any point. Manual slide open Press the SLIDE OPEN ( ) button on the overhead console for less than 0. To stop the sunroof sliding at any point. The sunroof will tilt all the way open. press the SLIDE OPEN ( ) button on the overhead console and hold it until the sunroof is closed. press any sunroof control button. The sunroof will slide all the way close. B460C01NF-GAT Tilting the Sunroof System Close To close the sunroof.5 second.

4. o Periodically remove any dirt that may have accumulated on the guide rails. 3. o Do not press any sunroof control button longer than necessary.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 72 B460D01NF-GAT ! Manual Operation of Sunroof CAUTION: If the sunroof does not operate electrically: o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold temperatures or when it is covered with ice or snow. Open the spectacle case. 8:49 AM . Turn the wrench clockwise to open or counterclockwise to close the sunroof. 2. nfhma-1a. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided with the vehicle into the socket.p65 72 4/28/2005. This wrench can be found in the vehicle's glove box. Damage to the motor or system components could occur. HNF2029 HNF2028 1. Remove the two mounting screws of the front overhead console with a phillips screwdriver.

! CAUTION: If the sunroof is not reset. 4. Then press the TILT UP button for 1 second. 2) In case that the sunroof has been opened: Press and hold the TILT UP button for more than 5 seconds until the sunroof has closed completely. the light stays on at all times. According to the position of the sunroof. The interior courtesy light has two buttons. Map Light Without sunroof Interior Light With sunroof B480B01NF HNF2110 Push in the map light switch to turn the light on or off. do as follows. The two buttons are: o DOOR In the "DOOR" position. 3. 8:49 AM . release it. Then. The light goes out gradually 30 seconds after the door is closed. the interior courtesy light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition key position. 1) In case that the sunroof has closed completely or been tilted : Press the TILT UP button for 1 second. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map light at night or as a personal light for the driver and the passenger. or you use the emergency handle to operate the sunroof. Press and hold the TILT UP button once again until the sunroof has returned to the original TILT UP position after it raises a little higher than the maximum TILT UP position. you have to reset your sunroof system as follows: 1. it may not operate properly. o ON In the "ON" position. the sunroof system is reset. When this is complete. 2.p65 73 4/28/2005. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 73 INTERIOR LIGHT B460E01NF-AAT B480B01Y-AAT B490A02NF-GAT Resetting the sunroof Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged. nfhma-1a.

8:49 AM . To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop. nfhma-1a. o To open the glove box. pull on the glove box release lever. Push the end of the cover to open the spectacle case. HNF2175 ! WARNING: ! WARNING: Do not keep objects except spectacles inside the spectacle case. HNF2183 The spectacle case is located on the front overhead console. o The glove box door can be locked (and unlocked) with the key. possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 74 SPECTACLE CASE B491A03O-GAT STORAGE BOX B500A01Y-AAT ! GLOVE BOX CAUTION: Do not leave this button pressed for an extended period of time when the vehicle is not running.p65 74 4/28/2005. Such objects can be thrown from the case in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. the glove box door should be kept closed when the car is in motion.

It is used for storing small articles.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 75 B500B01NF-GAT B500B01HP-DAT B500A01NF-GAT Illuminated Glove Box Opening the glove box will automatically turn on the light when the multi-function switch is turned to the first position. MULTI BOX ACCESSORY BOX B500B02NF-A B500A01NF The multi box may be opened by pulling it out by its grip. 8:49 AM . The accessory box may be opened by pushing the knob downward. It is used for storing small articles. nfhma-1a.p65 75 4/28/2005.

always be sure it is locked in position properly.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 76 CENTER CONSOLE COMPARTMENT B505A01NF-GAT Center Console Box The center console box is used for storing cassette tapes or small articles. pull up the handle and lift the lid as shown.p65 76 4/28/2005. NOTE: When not in use. HNF2177 nfhma-1a. B505B01NF-GAT Center Console Armrest (If Installed) ! WARNING: To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop. 8:49 AM . pull out the console box lid by pulling up the handle as shown. HNF2176 HNF2178 The center console box can be used as armrest. the center console box lid should be kept closed when the car is in motion. To use the console armrest. To use the center console box.

both directly behind the vehicle. nfhma-1a.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 77 OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR B510B01Y-AAT ! Electric Type WARNING: ! CAUTION: Do not place cups or cans in the drink holder when the console box lid is used as an armrest. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appropriate perimeter switch as illustrated. 2. and to the rear of the left and right sides.p65 77 4/28/2005. The remote control outside rearview mirror switch controls the adjustments for both right and left outside mirrors. Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the passenger side rearview mirror. o Scraping ice from the mirror face could cause permanent damage. To remove any ice. It may result in spilling the beverage. It is a convex mirror with a curved surface. 8:49 AM . A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure you or your passengers. o Do not operate the switch continuously for an unnecessary length of time. ! B510B01NF WARNING: The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted to your preferred rear vision. soft cloth or approved de-icer. and any objects seen in this mirror are closer than they appear. To adjust the position of either mirror: 1. Spilled liquids can damage interior trim and electric components. Move the selecting switch to the right or left to activate the adjustable mechanism for the corresponding door mirror. use a sponge.

push in the switch for the rear window defroster. To heat the outside rearview mirror glass. the glare of headlights of cars behind you is reduced. nfhma-1a. Push the switch again to turn the heater off. The "night" position is selected by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you. In the "night" position. 8:49 AM .1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 78 B510D01HP-AAT DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR B520A01A-AAT OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER With Manual A/C Manual Type With Automatic A/C B520A01NF Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night inside rearview mirror.p65 78 4/28/2005. The outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself off after 20 minutes. HNF2113-A The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated in connection with the rear window defroster. The rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear vision in inclement weather conditions.

etc. 8:49 AM . Channel 1 Button Channel 2 Button Status Indicator LED Channel 3 Button 5. this safety feature will automatically detect and eliminate dangerous rearview mirror glare while the compass indicates the direction the vehicle is pointed.p65 79 4/28/2005. 4. 2. B520C01NF 1. 6. estate gate. Rear Light Sensor Dimming On/Off Button Compass Control Button Display nfhma-1a.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 79 HOMELINK MIRROR B520C01NF-AAT Automatic-Dimming Mirror with Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass Display and HomeLink® (If Installed) Your vehicle comes with a Gentex AutomaticDimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass Display and an Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control System. During nighttime driving. 7. 3. 8. home lighting. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s).

Compass Function The Compass can be turned ON and OFF and will remember the last state when the ignition is cycled. Press and release the button to turn the display feature OFF. Press and release the button again to turn the display back ON. nfhma-1a.gentex. The compass in the mirror can compensate for this difference when it knows the Magnetic Zone in which it is operating. To turn the display feature ON/OFF: 1.com. The auto-dimming function can be controlled by the Dimming ON/OFF Button: 1. NE. There is a difference between magnetic north and true north. This is set either by the dealer or by the user. Any object that would obstruct either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 80 Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is the most advanced way to eliminate dangerous and annoying glare in the rearview mirror during any driving situation. For more information regarding NVS® mirrors and other applications. The operating Zone Numbers for North America are shown in the figure to the right. 2. your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you.p65 80 4/28/2005. Z-Nav™ Compass Display The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass that shows the vehicle Compass heading in the Display Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N.). Automatic-Dimming Function To protect your vision during nighttime driving. Pressing the button turns the autodimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning off. SE. etc. These light sensors are visible through openings in the front and rear of the mirror case. please refer to the Gentex website: www. E. 2. Pressing the button again turns the autodimming function ON which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on. Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the button and are detailed below. 8:49 AM . NOTE: The mirror defaults to the "ON" position each time the vehicle is started. ! CAUTION: The NVS® Mirror automatically reduces glare during driving conditions based upon light levels monitored in front of the vehicle and from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Releasing the button when the desired Zone Number appears on the display will set the new Zone. To re-calibrate the compass: 1. the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct for these changes. 8:49 AM .p65 81 4/28/2005. 3. 2. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat …13. drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 Km/h). 1.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 81 To adjust the Zone setting: 1. 4. the current Zone Number will appear on the display. Press and hold the button for more than 6 seconds. Determine the desired Zone Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map. Press and hold the button for more than 3 but less than 6 seconds. …). 14. Items such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna or even some body repair work on the vehicle can cause changes to the vehicle's magnetic field. 15. B520C05NF nfhma-1a. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display. There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle magnets. In these situations. Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again. To calibrate the compass. 2.

federal safety standards. contact HomeLink ® at: www. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink® programming.com or 1-800-355-3515. 1982). even home lighting. o Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the second (or "accessories") position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. the programmed HomeLink® buttons be erased for security purposes.homelink.does not meet current U. nfhma-1a. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.homelink. make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Programming HomeLink® ! CAUTION: NOTE: o When programming a garage door opener.S.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 82 Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control System The HomeLink® Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single built-in device. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.p65 82 4/28/2005. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1.S. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the outlined procedures. Before programming HomeLink® to a garage door opener or gate operator. o In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below. Do not use HomeLink® with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features as required by U. entry door locks. garage door openers. A garage door that cannot detect an object . 8:49 AM . o It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators. security systems. Additional HomeLink® information can be found at: www.signaling the door to stop and reverse .

NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step3. Rolling Code Programming Rolling code devices which are "code-protected" and manufactured after 1996 may be determined by the following: o Reference the device owner's manual for verification. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons. At the garage door opener receiver (motorhead unit) in the garage. follow these instructions: 1.com. To train rolling code devices. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand.) 4. Release both buttons. reference the device owner's manual or please visit our Web site at www.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 83 Standard Programming To train most devices. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from the HomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicator light in view. hold for two seconds and then release the desired HomeLink® button. 6. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink® button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. Return to the vehicle and firmly press. Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds. until the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds).homelink. programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. 3. Gate Operator & Canadian Programming During programming. o The handheld transmitter appears to program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the device. 2. If the indicator light stays on constantly. For first-time programming. Release both buttons. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. If there is difficulty locating the training button. While continuing to hold the buttons the red Indicator Status LED will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® successfully trains to the frequency signal from the handheld transmitter. The device has the rolling code feature if the indicator light flashes rapidly and then turns solid after 2 seconds. 3. programming is complete and your device should activate. (Some devices may require you to repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. 2. follow steps 2 through 5. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button (which activates the "training light"). 4. The indicator light will flash slowly and nfhma-1a. Repeat the "press/ hold/release" sequence a second time to complete the programming. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter button. o Press and hold the trained HomeLink button. 5. your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. follow either steps 1 through 4 above for other Rolling Code devices or steps 2 through 5 in Standard Programming for standard devices. press and hold the two outside buttons. HomeLink® Channel 1 and Channel 3 Buttons. 5. locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. If the indicator light stays on constantly. 8:49 AM . Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink® button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. follow these instructions: 1. Continue to press the Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control System button (note steps 2 through 4 in the Standard Programming portion of this document) while you press and re-press ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned.p65 83 4/28/2005.

However. Incorporated. gate operator. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i. 3. 2. and (2) this device must accept any interference received. FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3 IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3 This device complies with Part 15 FCC Rules. including interference that may cause undesired operation. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash. Operating HomeLink® To operate. 8:49 AM . Release both buttons. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a new device to a previously trained HomeLink® button. etc. Michigan. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control System is now in the training (learn) mode and can be programmed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming sections above.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 84 then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.e. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly. Press and hold the handheld transmitter button. Erasing HomeLink® Buttons Individual buttons cannot be erased. position the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the HomeLink® surface.p65 84 4/28/2005. first slowly and then rapidly. simply press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. 5. garage door opener. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device. HomeLink® is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls. Zeeland. NVS® is a registered trademark and Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex Corporation. Do NOT release until step 4 has been completed. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.). Wisconsin. the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. programming is complete and your new device should activate. nfhma-1a. release both buttons. ! WARNING: The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Milwaukee. home/office lighting. If the indicator light stays on constantly. For convenience. entry door lock. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink® ® button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference. to erase all three programmed buttons: 1. 2. 4. security system. follow these steps: 1.

8:49 AM . If it is left open or ajar. lower the trunk lid. lower the brake lever. poisonous exhaust gases may enter the car and serious illness or death may result. pull up and press the thumb button. o To release the parking brake. To be sure the trunk lid is securely fastened. B540A01NF To open the trunk lid without using the key. it will not be possible to open the trunk nfhma-1a. pull up the lid release lever. See additional warnings concerning exhaust gases on page 22.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 85 PARKING BRAKE B530A01A-AAT TRUNK LID B540A01S-GAT Remote Trunk Lid Release ! WARNING: The trunk lid should always be kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. B540B04Y-AAT Trunk Lid Lock Knob B530A01NF Always engage the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. To close.p65 85 4/28/2005. while holding the button in. then press down on it until it locks. This also turns on the parking brake indicator light when the key is in the "ON" or "START" position. pull the lever up as far as possible. always check by trying to pull it up again. Before driving away. o To engage the parking brake. HNF2014-A If the trunk lid lock knob (located near the latch) is in the "LOCK" position when the trunk lid is closed. Then. be sure that the parking brake is fully released and the indicator light is off.

HNF2016 Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the dark emergency trunk release lever located inside the trunk. o If a person is locked in the trunk. B540B02E-AAT Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release ! WARNING: ! WARNING: Doors and trunk should be kept locked and keys be kept out of the reach of children. o HYUNDAI recommends that cars be kept locked and keys be kept out of the reach of children. In this instance. pull the emergency trunk release lever on the driver's side of the inside panel of the trunk to open the trunk lid. Parents also should teach their children about the dangers of playing in trunks.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 86 lid by using the remote release. push the trunk lid lock knob down. 8:49 AM .p65 86 4/28/2005. It will glow after the trunk is closed. To allow the trunk lid to be opened with the remote release. use the master key to unlock and open the trunk lid. o Parents should teach children about the emergency trunk release lever in their vehicle and how to open the trunk lid if they are accidentally locked in the trunk. this lever will release the trunk latch mechanism and open the trunk. and that parents teach their children about the dangers of playing in trunks. then to the opposite direction of the "LOCK" position. nfhma-1a. When pulled.

8:49 AM . The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel-filler lid opener switch located on the driver's door. the high mounted rear stop light in the center of the rear window also lights when the brakes are applied. spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.p65 87 4/28/2005. nfhma-1a. insert the key and turn it clockwise to unlock. NOTE: If the fuel-filler lid will not open because ice has formed around it. If necessary. In addition to the lower-mounted rear stop lights on either side of the car. The trunk compartment light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 87 HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT B540C01Y-AAT B550A02Y-AAT REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE B560A03Y-AAT To unlock using the key B550A01NF HNF2012 B560A02NF To open the trunk lid.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
88

!

WARNING:

!

WARNING:

HNF2021

!

WARNING:

o The fuel cap must be tightened until the cap clicks, otherwise " " light will illuminate. o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Before refueling, always stop the engine and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler area. If you need to replace the filler cap, use a genuine Hyundai replacement part.

o If you open the fuel filler cap during high ambient temperatures, a slight "pressure sound" may be heard. This is normal and not a cause for concern. Whenever you open the fuel filler cap, turn it slowly. o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replaced and securely seated after fueling. Failure to replace or fully seat the fuel filler cap will result in fuel vapors escaping into the atmosphere and the check engine " " indicator illuminating. o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle shut off when refueling. o Automotive fuels are flammable/explosive materials. When refueling, please note the following guidelines carefully. - Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel filler cap, have one's hands in contact with metal parts away from the filler neck to discharge static electricity.

- Do not get back in the vehicle while refueling. Do not operate anything that can produce static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in an explosion. - When using a portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground while refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. While starting refueling, contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. - Do not use cellular phones around a gas station. The electric current or electronic interference from cellular phones can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. - When refueling, always turn the engine off. Sparks by engine compartment electrical equipment can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. After refueling, check to make sure the fuel filler cap is securely closed, and then start the engine. - Do not smoke or try to light cigarettes around a gas station. Automotive fuels are flammable.

nfhma-1a.p65

88

4/28/2005, 8:49 AM

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
89

HOOD RELEASE
B560B01L-GAT B570A01NF-GAT

Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release

3. Raise the hood by hand. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.

!

WARNING:

B570A01NF HNF2022

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened using the remote opener, a manual opener handle is located inside the trunk on the left side. Open the fuel filler lid by pulling on this handle as shown in the illustration.

o Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could fly open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident. o Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed and the hood could fall or be damaged.

HNF2024-E

2. Pull the secondary latch up and lift the hood.

nfhma-1a.p65

89

4/28/2005, 8:49 AM

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
90

SUN VISOR
B580A01NF-GAT B500B01B-GAT B580C01JM-AAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor Extender

B580A01NF

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to give the driver and front passenger either frontal or sideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut out direct rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down. Vanity mirrors are provided on the back of the sun visor for the driver and front passenger.

HNF2172

B580C01NF

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automatically turn on the mirror light.

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visor extenders that may be used when the visor is in the side glass position.

NOTE:
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) label containing useful information can be found on the back of each sun visor.

!

WARNING:

Do not place the sun visor in such a manner that it obscures visibility of the roadway, traffic or other objects.

nfhma-1a.p65

90

4/28/2005, 8:49 AM

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
91

STEERING WHEEL
B600A01NF-GAT B600B01NF-GAT

Tilt type

Tilt and telescopic type (If Installed)

!

CAUTION:

After adjusting the steering wheel, try moving it up and down to make sure it is locked in position.

!
HNF2067

WARNING:

Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while driving as this may result in loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury or death. To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to unlock. 2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position. 3. After adjustment, release the lever. To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Push the lever downward fully to unlock. 2. Adjust upward or downward and forward or backward to set the steering wheel to the desired position. 3. After adjustment, securely tighten the lever by pulling it upward.
B600B01NF-A

nfhma-1a.p65

91

4/28/2005, 8:49 AM

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
92

FRONT DOOR WARNING LIGHT
B620A01S-AAT

HORN
B610A01L-GAT

REAR SEAT ARMREST
B611A01Y-AAT

B620A01NF

B610A01NF

B611A01NF-A

A red light comes on when the front door is opened. The purpose of this light is to assist when you get in or out and also to warn passing vehicles.

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound the horn.

This armrest is located in the center of the rear seatback.

nfhma-1a.p65

92

4/28/2005, 8:49 AM

Push the cruise control ON/OFF switch. When you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Push the "SET" (COAST) switch after you have set the vehicle speed at the desired speed. Accelerate to desired cruising speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). the vehicle will return to the speed you have set. This system is designed to function above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). 2. If the "SET (COAST)" switch is selected. tollroads. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the desired speed will automatically be maintained.p65 93 4/28/2005. The cruise control system provides automatic speed control for your comfort when driving on freeways. 3. B660B01NF-AAT To Set the Cruise Speed B660B02NF B660A01NF 1. temporarily depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. The "CRUISE" indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. 5. To increase speed. the cruise "SET" indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. 8:49 AM . 4.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 93 CRUISE CONTROL B660A01S-AAT NOTE: If the vehicle speed decreases more than 9 mph (15 km/h) below the set speed or decreases below 25 mph (40 km/h). the cruise control system will automatically cancel the set speed. or other noncongested highways. nfhma-1a. This turns the system on.

The vehicle will automatically resume the speed set prior to cancellation when you push the control switch "RESUME (ACCEL)" and release it to return (when travelling above 25 mph). When the desired speed is obtained. While the control switch is pushed.1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 94 B660C01NF-AAT B660D01NF-AAT To Cancel the Cruise Speed To Resume the Preset Speed If the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" is selected. release the control switch. the vehicle speed will gradually decrease. Push the control switch "SET (COAST)" and hold it. Accelerate to desired speed and release the control switch. nfhma-1a. the cruise "SET" indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate. If the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" is selected. If the "SET(COAST)" switch is selected. B660F01NF-GAT To Reset at a Slower Speed B660C01NF B660D01NF To disengage the cruise control system. the cruise "SET" indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate. B660B02NF B660E01NF-GAT To Reset at a Faster Speed 1. o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h). Push the control switch "RESUME (ACCEL)" and hold it. 8:49 AM . o Release the cruise control ON/OFF switch. 2.p65 94 4/28/2005. 1. push the control switch "CANCEL". Additionally. 2. the cruise "SET" indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. While the control switch is held. o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25 mph (40 km/h). the vehicle will gradually gain speed. the following actions will disengage the system: o Depress the brake pedal. o Shift the selector lever to "N" position (Automatic transaxle). o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).

NOTE: Do not operate audio remote control switches simultaneously. the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. o During normal cruise control operation. do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal. o Once again press the MUTE switch to restore the sound. or on slippery (rainy. MUTE Switch o Press the MUTE switch to slience the sound.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 95 AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH B610A01NF-AAT ! WARNING: o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch off when not using the cruise control. icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads. when the "SET" switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes. o Do not use the cruise control when it may not be safe to keep the car at a constant speed. MODE Switch Press the MODE switch to select Radio. o Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control system. depress the clutch pedal or release the cruise control ON/OFF switch. o During cruise-speed driving of a manual transaxle vehicle. for instance. driving in heavy or varying traffic. CD (Compact Disc) and CDC (Compact Disc Changer). Each press of the switch changes the display as follows: nfhma-1a. since the engine will be overrevved. o Press the VOL ( volume. VOL ( → (If Installed) RADIO (FM1 → FM2 → AM) → CD → CDC / ) Switch ) switch to increase ) switch to decease B610A01NF-A o Press the VOL ( volume. o Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.p65 95 4/28/2005. If this happens. 8:49 AM . This delay is normal.

turn the control knob under the vents. 2. The vents are closed when the vent knob is moved to " ". To control the amount of air. Side Defroster Nozzle Side Ventilator Windshield Defroster Nozzle Center Ventilator B710A01NF-A nfhma-1b. turn the control knob on the left side of the vents. The side ventilators are located on each side of the dashboard.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 96 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL B710A01E-GAT B710B01NF-GAT Center Ventilator/Side Ventilator The center ventilators are located in the middle of the dashboard. 1.p65 96 3/9/2005. Keep these vents clear of any obstructions. 10:49 AM . To change the direction of the air flow. The vents are opened when the vent knob is moved to " " position. 4. 3.

p65 97 3/9/2005. 2. 10:49 AM . 5. may be controlled manually by setting the blower control between the "1" and "4" position. Temperature control Fan speed control Air flow control Air conditioning switch Air intake control Rear window defroster switch This is used to turn the heating system on and off and to select the degree of heating desired.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 97 HEATING AND VENTILATION B670A01NF-GAT B670E01A-AAT B670B02O-AAT Rotary and Push Button Type Temperature Control Fan Speed Control (Blower Control) Cool Warm HNF2118-A HNF2126 HNF2125-A 1. 4. This is used to select the blower fan speed. nfhma-1b. 3. 1 is the lowest fan speed and 4 is the highest fan speed. The blower fan speed. 6. and therefore the volume of air delivered from the system.

This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time. Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position. Bi-Level. The "OFF" mode is used to turn the blower fan off. 10:49 AM . Five symbols are used to represent Face. nfhma-1b.p65 98 3/9/2005.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 98 B670D04O-AAT Air Flow Control HNF2120 HNF2121 HNF2119-A Face-Level Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be discharged through the face level vents. or windshield. Bi-Level Air is discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster. This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor. Floor. dashboard outlets.

If the "Floor" mode is selected. side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated to improve windshield defrosting.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 99 HNF2122 HNF2123 HNF2124 Floor-Level Air is discharged through the floor vents. NOTE: If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode is selected.p65 99 3/9/2005. If the "Defrost" mode is selected. nfhma-1b. the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated. the air conditioning will not turn off by pushing the A/C button. windshield defroster nozzle. Floor-Defrost Level Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle. side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected. Defrost-Level Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle. the floor vents. the "Fresh" mode will be activated. 10:49 AM .

NOTE: o The air intake control switch will change to " " mode when the ignition switch is turned "ON" with the MAX A/C mode selected. 10:49 AM . side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. NOTE: If the air flow control is off. * B670D02NF-A OFF-Level B670D01NF-A ON ON * The A/C or the air intake control switch returns to its former setting.p65 100 3/9/2005. Air Intake A/C Control Switch ON or ON or OFF * OFF OFF ON or OFF * Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle. the A/C will turn on automatically and "Recirculation" mode will be activated.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 100 If the air flow control is set to the floordefrost or the defrost mode. o When you change to another mode from MAX A/C. the A/C and the air intake control switch are set as shown in the following chart. the A/C will turn on automatically but the A/C indicator light does not turn on. If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected. nfhma-1b. MAX A/C-Level Air is discharged through the face level vents. The A/C will not turn off until the air flow control is set to the another mode except the floor-defrost mode and the defrost mode. the air intake control is set to the fresh mode automatically.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON" the air intake control switch will change to " " mode in floor. For normal heating operation.p65 101 3/9/2005. set the air flow control to the floor ( ) position. move the temperature control to "Warm". With the " " mode selected. the air intake control switch should be set in the recirculate ( ) position.) For faster heating. B690A01O-AAT B690A01NF-A HNF2127-A This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculation of inside air. Fresh Recirculation With the " " mode selected. In addition prolonged use of the air conditioning with the " " mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry. 10:49 AM . air from within the passenger compartment is drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the other functions selected.) For maximum heat. floor-defrost and defrost position. This is normal operation. the air intake control switch will change to " " mode when the ignition switch is turned "ON" with the MAX A/C mode selected. air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the other functions selected. set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 HEATING CONTROLS B670C02Y-AAT 101 Air Intake Control NOTE: o It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in " " mode will give rise to fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. But. nfhma-1b. (The "Fresh" mode will be activated. If the windows fog up.

turn on the air conditioning system. and adjust temperature control to desired temperature. To use this feature: o Set the air intake control switch to the fresh air ( ) position. o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed. nfhma-1b. 10:49 AM . o To direct all intake air to the dashboard vents. Be sure to return the control to the position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. o To prevent interior fog on the windshield. ice or other obstructions.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 102 BI-LEVEL HEATING B700A02A-AAT VENTILATION B710A01A-AAT B730A01L-AAT Operation Tips o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system. o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm". To operate the ventilation system: o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( ) position. o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm". This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time. set the air intake control to the fresh air ( ) position and fan speed to the desired position.p65 102 3/9/2005. snow. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves. o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( ) position. B700A01NF-A B710A02NF-A Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heating controls. o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed. set the airflow control to the face ( ) position. temporarily set the air intake control at the position. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

) o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( ) position. For greater cooling. To use the air conditioning to cool the interior: o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position. Air Conditioning Switch (If Installed) Air Conditioning Operation Cooling HNF2128-A B740B01NF-A The air conditioning is turned on or off by pushing the A/C button on the heating/air conditioning control panel. turn the fan control to one of the higher speeds or temporarily select the recirculate ( ) position on the air intake control. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time. The temperature may be moderated by moving the control toward "Warm". 10:49 AM . nfhma-1b. ("Cool" provides maximum cooling. o Turn on the air conditioning switch by pushing in on the switch.p65 103 3/9/2005.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM B740A01S-AAT B740B03O-AAT 103 o Set the temperature control to "Cool".

nfhma-1b. o When you are using the air conditioning system. o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( ) position. o Adjust the temperature control to provide the desired amount of warmth. o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. o During winter months or in periods when the air conditioning is not used regularly. B740C01NF-A For dehumidified heating: o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position. keep all windows closed to keep hot air out. o Turn on the air conditioning switch. This increases engine speed. o For more rapid action. run the air conditioning once every month for a few minutes. This will help circulate the lubricants and keep your system in peak operating condition. as in heavy traffic. 10:49 AM . o When moving slowly. which in turn increases the speed of the air conditioning compressor. set the fan at one of the higher speeds. shift to a lower gear. turn the air conditioning off to avoid the possibility of the engine overheating. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time.p65 104 3/9/2005. o On steep grades.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 104 B740C02O-AAT B740D02Y-AAT De-Humidified Heating Operation Tips o If the interior of the car is hot when you first get in. open the windows for a few minutes to expel the hot air.

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.) o Set the temperature control to the desired position. nfhma-1b. set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the low position. NOTE: When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ). it may cause fog to form on the exterior windshield. o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4". (The A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will be activated. o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.p65 105 3/9/2005. If this occurs. To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield. 10:49 AM .) o Set the temperature control to warm. (The A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will be activated.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING B720A02E-AAT 105 Manual A/C Automatic A/C Manual A/C Automatic A/C B720A01NF-A B720A02NF-A Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield: To remove interior fog on the windshield.

3. 10. Temperature Control Defroster Switch Display Window Rear Window Defroster Switch Blower Fan Control AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch Air Flow Control Switch Air Conditioning Switch Air lntake Control Switch Air Quality System Switch (If Installed) 11. TYPE A (Without Air Quality System) B970B01NF-GAT Heating and Cooling Controls 1. 7. 4. 9. 6.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 106 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM B970A01Y-AAT (If lnstalled) Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic heating and cooling control system controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.p65 106 3/9/2005. 8. 5. 2. OFF Switch B970B01NF TYPE B (With Air Quality System) B970B02NF nfhma-1b. 10:49 AM .

7°F(1. And. the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is higher than 34.p65 107 3/9/2005. This is a normal condition and you can change the temperature mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows. The indicator light will illuminate confirming that the Face. The display shows that the unit of temperature is adjusted to Centigrade or Fahrenheit (°C → °F or °F → °C). Turn the "TEMP" knob to set the desired temperature.5°C) and automatically turns off if the ambient temperature drops below 33.6°C). 2. nfhma-1b. B970C01NF-A NOTE: Never place anything over the sensor which is located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system. the temperature mode will reset to Centigrade degrees. The temperature will increase to the maximum "HI" by turning the knob clockwise.08°F(0. The temperature will decrease to the minimum "LO" by turning the knob counterclockwise. HNF2137 Photo Sensor HNF2135 The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Control) system automatically controls heating and cooling as follows: 1.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 107 B970C01NF-AAT Automatic Operation NOTE: If the battery has been discharged or disconnected. 10:49 AM . Floor and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower speed and air conditioner will be controlled automatically. Press the "OFF" and "AUTO " button simultaneously for 3 seconds. Push the "AUTO" switch.

Fan Speed Control Air Intake Control Switch (Without A.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 108 B980A01Y-AAT B980B01NF-GAT B670C02Y-AAT MANUAL OPERATION The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well by pushing buttons other than the "AUTO" button. push the control button. nfhma-1b. This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculation of inside air. Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert to automatic control of the system. FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button goes on when the air intake control is in fresh mode. the system sequentially works according to the order of buttons selected.Q. The function of the buttons which are not selected will be controlled automatically. The higher the fan speed is. 10:49 AM . In this state. Recirculation mode). Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the fan. To change the air intake control mode (Fresh mode.p65 108 3/9/2005. the more air is delivered. RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is in recirculation mode.S) HNF2133 HNF2139 The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by turning the fan speed control knob.

air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected. B980C03Y-GAT Air Intake Control Switch (With A. prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculation mode ( ) sele-cted may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry. the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( ) is automatically converted to the ( ) mode.p65 109 3/9/2005. to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle. The air intake control operates in "AUTO" mode when turning the ignition to the ON position if the "AUTO" mode was used before shutting off the engine. The air intake control operates in "AUTO" mode when turning the ignition to the ON position if the "AUTO" mode was used before shutting off the engine. : : OFF ON Fresh mode : Air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected. With the "Recirculation" mode selected. In addition. 10:49 AM . nfhma-1b. air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected. This is normal operation. In addition. prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 109 With the "Fresh" mode selected. This is normal operation. NOTE: o It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in "recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. Exhaust gas cutoff mode : Air enters the vehicle from the outside. But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the outside.S) (If Installed) Recirculation mode : Air from witin the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected. NOTE: o It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in recirculation mode ( ) will give rise to misting of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. o When the ignition switch is turned "ON" the air intake control will change to " " mode (regardless of switch position).Q. o When the ignition switch is turned "ON". HNF2139-1 This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculate inside air automatically. the air intake control will change to "Fresh" mode (regardless of switch position).

the indicator light will come on. Air can be directed to the floor.Q. nfhma-1b. HNF2143 Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation of the heating and cooling system.Q. Four symbols are used to represent Face. 10:49 AM . set the air intake control to the Fresh air position or A.S control to "OFF". causing air to be discharged through the face level vents. B980D01Y-AAT Heating and Cooling System Off HNF2120 B980E01NF-A Face-Level When selecting the "Face-Level" mode. Floor. or windshield. This is used to direct the flow of air. Bi-Level.p65 110 3/9/2005.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 110 B980E01NF-GAT ! Air Flow Control CAUTION: If the windows fog up with the Recirculation or A. dashboard outlets. Floor-Defrost position.S mode selected.

This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time. side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. the floor vents. nfhma-1b. Floor-Level When selecting the "Floor-Level". 10:49 AM . the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. If any of the temperature control switch. Floor-Defrost Level When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode. the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle. side defroster nozzle and side ventilator.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 111 HNF2121 HNF2122 HNF2123 Bi-Level When selecting the "Bi-Level". the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the floor vents. or the defrost switch is selected in "Floor-Defrost" mode. windsheld defroster nozzle.p65 111 3/9/2005. the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated. the blower fan control switch.

the air conditioning is turned on automatically to control the humidity. rough roads.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 112 B980F01NF-AAT B980G01NF-AAT Defrost Switch Auto De-humidified Control (If Installed) There is a humidity sensor in the middle of the instrument panel. To replace the air conditioner filter.5°C) and automatically turns off if the ambient temperature drops below 33. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty. To assist in defrosting. more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required. side defroster nozzle and side ventilator. the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is higher than 34. the " " mode will be automatically selected and the air will be discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle. It operates to decrease the amount of pollutants entering the car. refer to page 6-22.7°F(1. ! B760A01NF-AAT CAUTION: B980F01NF-A AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) (If Installed) Outside air When the "Defrost" button is pressed. o When the air flow rate is suddenly decreased. it must be checked at an authorized dealer.p65 112 3/9/2005. If it is very humid inside the car. o Replace the filter every 10. The air conditioner filter is located in the right side of the instrument panel. Inside of a vehicle Blower Filter Inside air Evaporator core HNF2181 nfhma-1b.6°C).08°F(0.000 km) or once a year.000 miles (15. 10:49 AM .

low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle. or other obstructions. the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction.p65 113 3/9/2005. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble: nfhma-1b. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your car. in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. Also. they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage. These long. FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM B750A02A-AAT 113 AM reception Ionosphere FM radio station Mountains Unobstructed area How Car Audio Works FM reception Ionosphere Buildings Obstructed area Iron bridges B750A03L B750A02L B750A01L AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station. 10:49 AM . closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. mountains. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your car speakers. However. FM signals are easily affected by buildings. AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. bridges or other large obstructions in the area. Because of this.

o Station Swapping . select another station with a stronger signal. or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. serious injury. use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment. or property damage. o Multi-Path Cancellation .Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade.Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. If this occurs.As an FM signal weakens. If this occurs. we suggest that you select another stronger station. Don't use a cellular phone when you are driving. noise may be produced from the audio equipment. another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. In such a case. This could result in loss of control. ! B750A04L B750A05L WARNING: o Fading . 10:49 AM . select another station until the condition has passed. When this occurs.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 114 B750B04Y-AAT Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle. and an accident that may cause death. You must stop at a safe place to use a cellular phone. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station. o Flutter/Static . This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. nfhma-1b.As your car moves away from the radio station.p65 114 3/9/2005.

Tune/Adjustment Mode Select Knob 6. BAND Selector 1. PRESET STATION SELECT Buttons 2. 10:49 AM . SEEK Operation 7. POWER ON-OFF / VOLUME Control Knob V480A01NF nfhma-1b. SCAN Button 4. EQ Button 3.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 AUDIO SYSTEM V480A01NF-AAT 115 STEREO RADIO OPERATION (V480) (If Installed) 5.p65 115 3/9/2005.

the volume will come back on at a "nominal" listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan mode. nfhma-1b. 2) Midrange adjust The midrange adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's midrange output. 4) Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers by rotating the AUDIO SEL knob. Press the button to switch between FM1. 4. o AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the midrange setting. 3. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the bass setting. Tune(manual) / Adjustment Mode Select Knob o Rotate counterclockwise to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). FM2 and AM memory preset stations. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off. 5) Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers by rotating the AUDIO SEL knob. Each subsequent press will select the next adjustment in the following order: 1) Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's bass output. o Press (up arrow) to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. o AM/FM select in CD mode Press this button to stop CD play and begin radio play. 5. BAND Selector The AM/FM select control works in radio and CD mode. 2. Adjustment Mode Select Pressing the AUDIO SEL knob will initiate Audio Mode. POWER ON-OFF / VOLUME Control Knob Press the PUSH PWR Control Knob to turn the audio system on or off.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 116 V480B01NF-AAT 1. SCAN Button Press the SCAN button to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. SEEK UP will display. SEEK DOWN will display. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease the volume. 3) Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's treble output. 10:49 AM . o Rotate clockwise to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). SEEK Operation (Automatic Channel Selection) o Press (down arrow) to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the treble setting.p65 116 3/9/2005.

ROCK. 10:49 AM . ! CAUTION: Setting memory preset stations o Select the frequency band with the BAND selector. CLASSICAL.p65 117 3/9/2005. PRESET STATION SELECT Buttons The radio is equipped with six preset station memory controls. Each press of the EQ button will advance to the next EQ setting. These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12 preset FM stations (six in AM. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Press and hold a memory preset control. 7. FM1. six in FM2). Rotate the TUNE control to go up or down the listening band in individual increments. or the playback mechanism could be damaged. POP. o Do not impact or strike the audio system. You will hear a beep and the station is held in memory on the control you selected. Radio and CD have independent EQ settings. or FM2. o Select a station. nfhma-1b. Press the AM/FM control to toggle between AM.Equalization Feature The radio has five EQ modes: OFF. and JAZZ. six in FM1. EQ Button.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 117 6. o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. o Press the SEEK control to access the next listenable station up or down the frequency band. There are a total possible of 18 preset stations.

SCAN Button 9.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 118 V480C01NF-AAT COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (V480) (If Installed) .p65 118 3/9/2005. TEXT/EQ Button 8. 10:49 AM . Adjustment Mode Select Knob 6.Compatiable with MP3 3. REPEAT(RPT) /RANDOM Button V480C01NF nfhma-1b. CD EJECT 2. FF/REV Button 1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button 7. TRACK UP/DOWN 4.CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR) 5.

the CD will begin play at the first track. SCAN Button Press the SCAN button to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. the CD play will begin where it stopped last. When in fast forward mode. RPT OFF. o Press and hold the REV button until the desired selection is reached. onto the label side or the recording side of any discs. 10:49 AM . the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. the repeat feature has three different modes: RPT Track. NO CD will display if the CD control is activated when there is not a CD present in the audio system. some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be playable on this unit. o Press the RPT control until the desired repeat mode is displayed. The audio system will then engage the desired repeat mode. 3. o The unit cannot play a CD-R(Recordable CD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that is not finalized. Please refer to the manual of the CD-R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/ CD-RW software for more information on the finalization process. If the beginning of the disc is reached. Release the button to disengage fast forward mode. 5. RPT DIR will continuously play the current MP3 directory. NOTE: o Do not apply paper. FF/REV o Press and hold the FF button until the desired selection is reached. RANDOM DISC randomly plays tracks from the disc presently in the audio system. your audio system will automatically lower the volume level of the playing media. o Depending on the recording status. your audio system will automatically lower the volume level of the playing media. as it may cause a malfunction. RPT Track will continuously play the current track selected. nfhma-1b.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 119 V480C01NF-AAT 1. and Random Off. After that. RANDOM DIRECTORY plays all the tracks on the current MP3 directory in random order. etc.p65 119 3/9/2005. After the last track has been completed. the random feature has three different modes: Random Disc. 4. When in reverse mode. RPT DIR. TRACK UP/DOWN o Press (down arrow) to revert to the previous track of the current disc. Random Directory (MP3 only). If the beginning of the disc is reached.) To stop on a particular selection. 2. Release the button to disengage reverse mode. wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD. The first track of the disc will begin playing. tape. RANDOM(RND) When engaged. the CD player seeks to the beginning of the last track on the current disc and begins playing. REPEAT(RPT) When engaged. (The CD scans in a forward direction.. press the button again. o Press (up arrow) to advance to the next track of the current disc. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button CD mode may be entered by pressing the CD button and then loading a CD into the audio system.

p65 120 3/9/2005. 4) Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers by rotating the AUDIO SEL knob. Each press of the EQ button will advance to the next EQ setting. 5) Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers by rotating the AUDIO SEL knob. 9. nfhma-1b. ROCK. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the treble setting. This feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF. o This unit is made of precision parts. keep the vehicle interior temperature within a normal range by using the vehicle's air conditioning or heating system. CLASSICAL (CLAS). POP. 6. o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers) to water or excessive moisture. o When replacing the fuse. CD EJECT o Press the EJ button to stop and eject a CD. 3) Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's treble output.Equalization Feature The Compact disc player has five EQ modes: OFF. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts. 8. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the bass setting. the player will automatically reload the CD. The audio system will then engage the desired random mode. o When driving your vehicle. MP3 TEXT mode Each press of the TEXT button will advance through the following MP3 track information: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Filename Song Title Artist Name Album Name Directory Name Number of tracks on the current disc Rotate the AUDIO-SEL knob to view additional characters. replace it with a fuse having the correct capacity. NOTE: o To assure proper operation of the unit. EQ Button . o This equipment is designed to be used only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground. be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside. Adjustment Mode Select Knob Pressing the AUDIO SEL knob will initiate Audio Mode. If a CD is ejected and not removed. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the midrange setting. 7. Each subsequent press will select the next adjustment in the following order: 1) Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's bass output.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 120 o Press the RND button until the desired shuffle mode is displayed. 10:49 AM . 2) Midrange adjust The midrange adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's midrange output. CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR) Press DIR control to change MP3 directories. and JAZZ. Radio and CD have independent EQ settings.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. nfhma-1b. o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD Rewritable to ensure proper operation. These can cause poor disc scratching to occur or damage the compact disc player.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 121 ! CAUTION: o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD player as damage to the unit may occur. When using the compact disc player.p65 121 3/9/2005. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. Do not use the audio system off-road as the discs could be scratched and damaged. 10:49 AM . or the playback mechanism could be damaged. o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur. o Do not impact or strike the audio system. o Driving off-road or other vibrations may skip your compact disc. professionally recorded CDs are recommended.

BAND Selector 1. SEEK Button 5. Tune/Adjustment Mode Select Knob 6. POWER ON-OFF / VOLUME Control Knob V490A01NF nfhma-1b. 10:49 AM .1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 122 V490A01NF-AAT STEREO RADIO OPERATION (V490) (If Installed) 4.p65 122 3/9/2005. SCAN/EQ Button 3. PRESET STATION SELECT Buttons 2.

o Rotate clockwise to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). o AM/FM select in CD mode Press this button to stop CD play and begin radio play. SEEK DOWN will display. 5. 4) Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers by rotating the AUDIO SEL knob. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the midrange setting. the volume will come back on at a "nominal" listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. o AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Adjustment Mode Select Pressing the AUDIO SEL knob will initiate Audio Mode. POWER ON-OFF / VOLUME Control Knob Press the PUSH PWR Control Knob to turn the audio system on or off. 2) Midrange adjust The midrange adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's midrange output. 10:50 AM . SEEK Operation (Automatic Channel Selection) o Press (down arrow) to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. Press the button to switch between FM1. Each subsequent press will select the next adjustment in the following order: 1) Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's bass output. SEEK UP will display. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease the volume. o Press (up arrow) to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. FM2 and AM memory preset stations. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off. 3) Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's treble output. Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan mode. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the treble setting. 3. 5) Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers by rotating the AUDIO SEL knob. nfhma-1b. SCAN EQ Button Press the SCAN button to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Tune(manual) / Adjustment Mode Select Knob o Rotate counterclockwise to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). BAND Selector The AM/FM select control works in radio and CD modes. 2. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the bass setting.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 123 V490B01NF-AAT 1. 4.p65 123 3/9/2005.

o Press the SEEK control to access the next listenable station up or down the frequency band. o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Setting memory preset stations o Select the frequency band with the BAND selector. Rotate the TUNE control to go up or down the listening band in individual increments. nfhma-1b. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. or the playback mechanism could be damaged. six in FM1. There are a total possible of 18 preset stations. Each press of the EQ button will advance to the next EQ setting. PRESET STATION SELECT Buttons The radio is equipped with six preset station memory controls. six in FM2).p65 124 3/9/2005. o Press and hold a memory preset control.Equalization Feature The radio has five EQ modes: OFF. These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12 preset FM stations (six in AM.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 124 EQ Button. FM1. ROCK. ! CAUTION: 6. and JAZZ. You will hear a beep and the station is held in memory on the control you selected. o Do not impact or strike the audio system. CLASSICAL. Press the AM/ FM control to toggle between AM. 10:50 AM . Radio and CD have independent EQ settings. or FM2. POP. o Select a station.

p65 125 3/9/2005.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 125 V490C01NF-AAT COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (V490) (If Installed) . FF/REV 1.MP3 TEXT mode 9. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button 11. TRACK UP/DOWN 7. CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR) 5. DISC Select Button 8. REPEAT(RPT)/RANDOM Button V490C01NF nfhma-1b.Compatiable with MP3 2. SCAN /EQ Button 3.Adjustment Mode Select Knob 10. LOAD Button 6. 10:50 AM . CD EJECT 4.

If some slots are already full and autoload is activated. 2. onto the label side or the recording side of any discs. Hold the button to fast-forward through the remaining discs. The CD is loaded into position and the audio system will display CD#. o This six-disc CD player is equipped with a CD door. nfhma-1b.) Hold the button to continue reversing through the discs. The player will move to the next slot after each disc has been loaded. Wait until the CD displays the insert CD message. the system will fill all empty slots. (Play will begin on the first track of the disc unless shuffle mode is engaged. 3. one at a time.p65 126 3/9/2005. Do not attempt to force the door open.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 126 V490D01NF-AAT 1. o The unit cannot play a CD-R(Recordable CD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that is not finalized.7 inch discs. LOAD Button The load feature allows you to load single CDs into the player internal to the audio. or press the DISC control to access the other loaded CDs. NOTE: o Do not apply paper.. Compact discs should only be inserted into the player after the door has opened. do not use irregular shaped CDs. The process is repeated until all six slots are full. tape. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button CD mode may be entered by pressing the CD button and then loading a CD into the audio system. and that particular slot is empty. Compact discs should only be loaded by pressing the LOAD control. Please refer to the manual of the CD-R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/ CD-RW software for more information on the finalization process. o Load the desired discs.6) of a loaded CD. Do not try to load more than six. some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be playable on this unit. press the corresponding preset control (1. etc. If an alternative CD is desired. NO CD will display and the system will begin to play the next available disc. NO CD will display if the CD control is activated when there is not a CD present in the audio system. The audio system plays the last CD loaded and the display is updated. NOTE: o This CD player is suitable only for 4. AUTOLOADING DISC SLOT# message will be displayed. After that. o Press (right arrow) to select the next disc. o Load the CD into the player. o Press and hold the LOAD button until AUTOLOAD# is displayed. The first track of the disc will begin playing. 10:50 AM . o Press the LOAD button. Each time the audio is ready for another CD. If the CD control is pressed followed by a preset number. DISC Select Button o Press (left arrow) to select the previous disc. Autoload This feature allows you to azzutoload up to six discs into the multi-disc CD player internal to the audio. as it may cause a malfunction. o The disc player holds up to six discs. the CD play will begin where it stopped last. o Depending on the recording status.

CD EJECT o Press the EJ button to stop and eject a CD. RPT Track will continuously play the current track selected. This feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF. (The CD scans in a forward direction. and JAZZ. SCAN /EQ Button Press the SCAN button to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. 6. If a CD is ejected and not removed. When a disc is loaded into a particular slot (16). the CD player seeks to the beginning of the last track on the current disc and begins playing. RPT OFF. POP. If a CD is ejected and not removed. If the end of the disc is reached. the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. your audio system will automatically lower the volume level of the playing media. When in reverse mode. TRACK UP/DOWN o Press (down arrow) to revert to the previous track of the current disc. Radio and CD have independent EQ settings. REPEAT(RPT) When engaged. 5. All CDs which are present in the player will be ejected one at a time. the player will automatically reload the CD. o Press and hold the REV button until the desired selection is reached. RPT DIR.p65 127 3/9/2005. o Press (up arrow) to advance to the next track of the current disc.) To stop on a particular selection. o Press the RPT control until the desired repeat mode is displayed.Equalization Feature The radio has five EQ modes: OFF. This feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF. If the beginning of the disc is reached. ROCK. 7. the number of a loaded slot is displayed by a circle to indicate the currently selected CD. the CD will return to the first track on the first disc.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 127 Display description There are six CD slots in the audio system. When in fast forward mode. The audio system will then engage the desired repeat mode. FF/REV o Press and hold the FF button until the desired selection is reached. Release the button to disengage fast forward mode. the CD will begin play at the first track. the repeat feature has three different modes: RPT Track. 10:50 AM . After the last track has been completed. Each press of the EQ button will advance to the next EQ setting. nfhma-1b. CLASSICAL. wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD. EQ Button . 8. your audio system will automatically lower the volume level of the playing media. the player will automatically reload the CD. 4. Release the button to disengage reverse mode. If the beginning of the disc is reached. press the button again. RPT DIR will continuously play the current MP3 directory. Auto eject o Press and momentarily hold the EJ button to engage auto eject.

9. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the midrange setting. o This equipment is designed to be used only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground. o This unit is made of precision parts.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 128 RANDOM(RND) When engaged. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the bass setting. 3) Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's treble output. 4) Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers by rotating the AUDIO SEL knob. replace it with a fuse having the correct capacity. 1) Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's bass output. be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside. o When replacing the fuse. nfhma-1b.p65 128 3/9/2005. Each subsequent press will select the next adjustment in the following order. Adjustment Mode Select Knob Pressing the AUDIO SEL knob will initiate Audio Mode. MP3 TEXT mode Each press of the TEXT button will advance through the following MP3 track information: 1) Song Title 2) Artist Name 3) Album Name 4) Filename 5) Directory Name 6) Number of tracks on the current disc Rotate the AUDIO-SEL knob to view additional characters. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts. keep the vehicle interior temperature within a normal range by using the vehicle's air conditioning or heating system. RANDOM DISC randomly plays tracks from the disc presently in the audio system. The audio system will then engage the desired random mode. NOTE: o To assure proper operation of the unit. 11. CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR) Press DIR control to change MP3 directories. o Press the RND control until the desired shuffle mode is displayed. 2) Midrange adjust The midrange adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system's midrange output. 5) Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers by rotating the AUDIO SEL knob. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob to change the treble setting. o When driving your vehicle. Random Directory (MP3 only). o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers) to water or excessive moisture. 10:50 AM . RANDOM DIRECTORY plays all the tracks on the current MP3 directory in random order. the random feature has three different modes: Random Disc. and Random Off. 10.

p65 129 3/9/2005.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 129 ! CAUTION: o Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD player as damage to the unit may occur. nfhma-1b. 10:50 AM . These can cause disc scratching to occur or damage the compact disc player. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill them. o Do not place beverages close to the audio system. o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD Rewritable to ensure proper operation. o Driving off-road or other vibrations may skip your compact disc. When using the compact disc player. Do not use the audio system off-road as the discs could be scratched and damaged. o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. o Do not insert anything like coins into the player slot as damage to the unit may occur. or the playback mechanism could be damaged. o Do not impact or strike the audio system. professionally recorded CDs are recommended.

If the surface is scratched. it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. nfhma-1b. Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism. If the surface is heavily soiled. Do not write on the disc. B850A02L Fingerprints. Do not drop the disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave fingerprints on the surface. See drawing. dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent to wipe it clean.1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 130 CARE OF DISCS B850A02F-AAT ANTENNA Storage When not in use. warped or cracked discs. place your discs in their individual case and store them in a cool place away from the sun. Damaged Disc Do not attempt to play damaged. paper. or soil on the surface of a disc could cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. B870D01Y-AAT Proper Handling Glass Antenna Keep Your Discs Clean B850A01L HNF2189 Handle your disc as shown. These could severely damage the playback mechanism.p65 130 3/9/2005. 10:50 AM . When the radio power switch is turned on while the ignition key is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position. and dust. your car will receive both AM and FM broadcast signals through the antenna in the rear window glass. dust. or gummed labels on the disc. heat. Do not affix tape. Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.

These can disturb receiving AM and FM broadcast signals. nfhma-1b. Cd.FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1 131 ! CAUTION: o Do not clean the inner side of the rear window glass with an abrasive type of glass cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign deposits from the inner surface of the glass as this may cause damage to the antenna elements. o Avoid adding metallic coatings to the rear window glass.p65 131 3/9/2005. such as Ni. 10:50 AM . etc.

...............2-15 Smooth Cornering ............................................ 2-3 Key Positions.2-12 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System ............................................................ 2-5 Automatic Transaxle .................................................................... 2-8 Power Adjustable Pedals ....................................DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! .........................................................................2-22 2 2 nfhma-2......................................... 2-3 Starting ...........................................................p65 1 5/6/2005...... 9:49 AM .........2-19 Vehicle Load Limit ........2-14 Driving for Economy ......................2-16 Trailer or Vehicle Towing ...................... 2-4 Operating the Manual Transaxle ............................2-13 Good Braking Practices .....................................................2-11 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 2-2 Before Starting the Engine ..................................................................................................................................2-16 Winter Driving ...........

the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds. certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To assure proper operation of the ventilation system. o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area. is a hazardous practice. including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle. have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 ! C010A03A-AAT WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS! Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide. o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car. ice. The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out. 2. ! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts. be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car. Letting the engine idle in your garage. o Do not inhale exhaust fumes. at any time. In addition. If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary: 1.p65 2 5/6/2005. leaves or other obstructions. Open side vents. 9:49 AM . If. Close all windows. even with the garage door open. Set the air intake control at "Fresh". open the windows immediately. odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation. If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car. contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. nfhma-2. o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. a colorless. be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior. 3.

Check that all windows and lights are clean. COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manual transaxle.p65 3 5/6/2005. o The ignition key cannot be turned from "ACC" position to "LOCK" position unless the shift lever is in the "P" (Park) position or the negative battery terminal is disconnected from the battery. o "START" The engine is started in this position. ACC LOCK ON START NOTE: o For safety.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 3 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE C020A01A-AAT TO START THE ENGINE C030A01E-AAT KEY POSITIONS C040A01A-AAT Before you start the engine. always confirm that the shift lever is securely positioned in "P" (Park) (For Automatic Transaxle). o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle. C040A01E ! CAUTION: The engine should not be turned off or the key removed from the ignition key cylinder while the car is in motion. the engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed fully (Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever is not in "P" or "N" Position (Automatic Transaxle). 4. Release it as soon as the engine starts. check that all appropriate warning lights are operating and that you have sufficient fuel. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors are clean and in position. Turn off all lights and accessories that are not needed. The steering wheel is locked by removing the key. Check your seat. nfhma-2. you should always: 1. 9. 2. To remove the key. 7. check to be sure the parking brake is engaged. place the shift lever in neutral and depress the clutch pedal fully. Lock all the doors. o To start the engine. After entering the car. o For additional information about starting. puddles of oil. 5. place the shift lever in "P" (park). 6. 9:49 AM . Check the operation of warning lights and all bulbs when key is in the "ON" position. water or other indications of possible trouble. seatback and headrest to be sure they are in their proper positions. 3. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON". 8. insert the ignition key and turn it to the "START" position. see page 2-4. Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more that 15 seconds. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are no flat tires. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all other occupants have fastened theirs. 10. It will crank until you release the key.

nfhma-2. the key should not be left in the "ON" position. 1. the steering wheel locks by removing the key. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. The carbon monoxide gas emitted is odorless and can cause serious injury or death. 3.p65 4 5/6/2005. To protect against theft. C070C01A-AAT C050A01A-AAT To remove the ignition key ACC LOCK ON o "ON" When the key is in the "ON" position. ! WARNING: Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your car in or out of the area.) may be operated. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition key counterclockwise from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position. NOTE: To unlock the steering wheel. 2. etc. If the engine is not running. This will discharge the battery and may also damage the ignition system. insert the key. START C050A01E C070C01E o "ACC" With the key in the "ACC" position. the ignition is on and all accessories may be turned on. some electrical accessories (radio. 9:49 AM .2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 4 STARTING NOTE: Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds. The key can be removed in the "LOCK" position. o "LOCK" The key can be removed or inserted in this position. and then turn the steering wheel and key simultaneously.

make certain all warning lights and gauges are functioning properly before starting the engine. On a manual transaxle equipped vehicle that can be started without depressing the clutch. C070A01NF-GAT C070A01NF-A ! WARNING: Be sure that the clutch is fully depressed when starting a manual transaxle vehicle. 3. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutral or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in "P" (park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key to the "START" position and release it when the engine starts. Insert key. 4.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 5 OPERATING THE MANUAL TRANSAXLE (5 SPEED M/T) C050B01A-AAT Normal Conditions: The Starting Procedure: 1. After turning the ignition key to the "ON" position. and fasten the seat belt. nfhma-2.p65 5 5/6/2005. Wait 15-30 seconds between starting attempts to protect the starter from overheating. This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. 9:49 AM . there is the potential to cause damage to the vehicle or injury to someone inside or outside the vehicle as a result of the forward or backward movement of the vehicle that will occur if the clutch is not depressed when the vehicle is started. After the engine has started. Your manual transaxle equipped vehicle will not start unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. The starter should not be operated for more than 15 seconds at a time. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished. allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear.

Such over-revving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage. and then shift into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly. caution should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift lever sideways in such a manner that second gear is engaged. rest the lever in neutral for at least 3 seconds after your car is completely stopped. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This causes unnecessary wear. o If you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse).p65 6 5/6/2005. Press the clutch pedal back down. Mis-shift prevention tab ! WARNING: Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5. ! CAUTION: NOTE: o To shift into reverse. then released slowly. shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position and release the clutch. The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving. nfhma-2.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 6 o Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving. as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks. Then move the lever into the reverse position. HNF3020 When shifting into reverse gear. This can cause unnecessary wear.000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may damage the engine. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle. When downshifting from fifth gear to fourth gear. 9:49 AM . Such a drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red-zone. C070B02A-AAT Using the Clutch The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting. o During cold weather. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car on an incline. pull the misshift prevention tab and shift into reverse gear position. Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the car on an incline.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. move the shift lever to neutral. 9:49 AM . an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. This is extremely hazardous. an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control. o Do not make quick steering wheel movements. In a collision. o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. When you do this.p65 7 5/6/2005. o Always wear your seat belts. depress the clutch. o Slow down when you encounter cross winds. o Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into reverse.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 7 C070E02O-AAT C070D02O-AAT RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS The shift points as shown on the chart are recommended for optimum fuel economy and performance. do not steer sharply. o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. accelerating or shifting gears. Shift from-to 1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 Recommended 15 mph (20 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h) 35 mph (55 km/h) 45 mph (75 km/h) Good Driving Practices o Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. slow down and shift to a lower gear. nfhma-2. o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds. This gives you much better control of your car. slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes. This will help avoid over-revving the engine. Instead. The transaxle can be damaged if you do not. Instead. Be especially careful when braking. engine braking will help slow the car. On a slippery surface. wait three seconds. such as sharp lane changes or fast. when you are driving down a long hill. Always leave the car in gear. which can cause damage. sharp turns. then shift to the reverse position. To shift into reverse. o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway. ! WARNING: o Avoid high cornering speeds. o Never exceed posted speed limits.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle. The selector lever can be shifted freely. In the main gate. the gear currently in use displays in the numeral indicator. nfhma-2.C.p65 8 5/6/2005. This is a normal condition. the selector lever has 4 positions. During sports mode operation.M (Transaxle Control Module). The selector lever has 2 gates. The indicator lights in the instrument cluster indicate the selector lever position when the ignition is switched "ON".2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 8 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (4 SPEED A/T. The function of each position is as follows: o P (Park): Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or while starting the engine. the main gate and the manual gate. ! CAUTION: Never place the selector lever in the "P" (Park) position unless the vehicle is fully stopped. Whenever parking the car. may be somewhat abrupt. apply the parking brake and shift the selector lever to the "P" (Park) position. NOTE: For information on manual gate operation. C090A02NF C090B02A-AAT C090A01NF NOTE: Depress the brake pedal when shifting. 9:49 AM . The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle has four/five forward speeds and one reverse speed. refer to "Sports Mode". depending on the position of the speed selector lever. The individual speeds are selected automatically. and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the T. 5 SPEED A/T) C090A01NF-GAT (If Installed) ! CAUTION: Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the vehicle is moving. Failure to observe this caution will cause severe damage to the transaxle. or if the battery has been disconnected.

moving the selector lever backwards and forwards can make rapid gearshifts simple.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 9 C090C01A-AAT C090F02L-GAT o R (Reverse): Use for backing up the vehicle. downshifts must be made carefully in accordance with the vehicle's speed.e. The engine can be started with the shift lever in "N" position. o In sports mode. Bring the car to a complete stop before shifting the selector lever to "R" position. o By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards (-) twice it is possible to skip one gear.. push the selector lever back into the main gate. it is possible to skip one gear. move the selector lever to the "R" or "P" position as required. i. Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion. which means that no gears are engaged. although this is not recommended except if the engine stalls while the car is moving. The transaxle will automatically shift through a four/five gear sequence. o For engine protection. the driver must execute upward shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions. Sports Mode ! CAUTION: C090D02A-AAT o N (Neutral): In the "N" position. taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. Since sudden engine braking and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss of traction. 3rd to 1st. When the vehicle stops. the transaxle is in neutral. C090F02NF C090E01NF-GAT o D (Drive): Use for normal driving. DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear. 4th to 2nd or 5th to 3rd. upward shifts are made automatically when the engine rpm reaches the red zone. 1st gear is automatically selected. UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. only the four/five forward gears can be selected.p65 9 5/6/2005. i. In sports mode. nfhma-2. however. downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down.e. o In sports mode. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st . NOTE: o In sports mode. 9:49 AM . SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forward or backward twice. sports mode is selected by pushing the selector lever from the "D" position into the manual gate. To reverse or park the vehicle. the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed. To return to "D" range operation. In contrast to a manual transaxle.

Never leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.p65 10 5/6/2005. Then. o Before driving away from a stop on a slippery road. to "R" or "D"position. C090J01NF If you cannot move the shift lever from the "P" (Park) position to any other position with the brake pedal fully depressed and the ignition key in the "ON" position. o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse or any of the forward positions with the brakes applied. the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the selector lever is operated. o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when the vehicle has completely stopped. Have the car checked by your Hyundai dealer. move the shift lever to the desired position. Push the selector lever to the -(DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear. depress the brake pedal when shifting from "Neutral" position or "Park" position to a forward or reverse gear. o When accelerating from a stop on a steep hill. and add fluid as necessary. nfhma-2. push the shift lock release button down. remove the cap on the console and with a thin object such as a flathead screwdriver. Shifting the shift lever into 2nd gear while in Sport mode will help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. with the brake pedal depressed. The vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid transaxle damage. o Always apply the footbrake when shifting from "P" or "N". 9:49 AM . Always set the parking brake. o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level regularly. o See the maintenance schedule for the proper fluid recommendation. shift the transaxle into "P" (Park) position and turn off the ignition when you leave the vehicle. This causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving away on a slippery road. push the selector lever forward into the +(UP) position.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 10 o To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety. the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards. even momentarily. o The ignition key must be in the "ON" position and the brake pedal fully depressed in order to move the shift lever from the "P" (Park) position to any of the other positions. C090H01L-GAT C090I03L-GAT C090J01NF-GAT SHIFT LOCK RELEASE (If Installed) ! CAUTION: NOTE: o For smooth and safe operation. "N". and then the shift lock release button will automatically return to its original position after shifting from the "P" (Park) position. or "D" position to "P" position. o It is always possible to shift from "R". it could mean your car is developing a problem. If you need to use the shift lock release. Then. o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in place of the parking brake. reinstall the cap.

do not steer sharply. o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. o Excessive depressing of the accelerater pedal in slippery driving conditions such as pulling out of deep snow or mud may cause severe damage to the transaxle. o Always use the parking brake. Instead. o Do not "ride" the brakes. the lower gear may not be engaged. such as sharp lane changes or fast. o Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. Always leave the car in gear when moving. when you are driving down a long hill. o Never exceed posted speed limits. an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control. Rocking the vehicle is not recommended. o Never move the gear selector lever into "P" when the vehicle is in motion. slow down and shift to a lower gear. o Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into "R". This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. ! (With Automatic Transaxle) (If Installed) WARNING: o Avoid high cornering speeds. 9:49 AM . turn the ignition key to the "ON" position with the selector lever in the "P" position and push the switch. o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keep the car from moving. the pedals move rearward. Rather. Instead. o Always wear your seat belts. slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes. sharp turns. engine braking will help slow the car.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 11 POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS C090N03O-AAT C100A01NF-AAT Good Driving Practices o Never move the gear selector lever from "P" or "N" to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed. o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway. If you push the " " portion of the switch. In a collision.p65 11 5/6/2005. the pedals move forward. This may be extremely hazardous. HNF2115-A To adjust the position of the accelerator and brake pedals. When you do this. Otherwise. If you push the " " portion of the switch. accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking. an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway. use an appropriate towing method. nfhma-2. o Do not make quick steering wheel movements. o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.

always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. a pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal when the brakes are applied. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system (Electronic Stability Control System) is functioning properly. nfhma-2. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking. in emergency situations or on slick roads. o Make sure that you can fully depress the brake pedal before driving. The safety features of an ABS (ESC) equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. o Never adjust the pedals with your foot on the accelerator pedal as this may result in increasing the engine speed and acceleration. C120A03A-AAT (If Installed) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking or on hazardous road surfaces. ! WARNING: o Adjust the pedals after parking the vehicle on level ground. Also. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. Never attempt to adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. The braking distance for cars equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ESC) may be longer than for those without it in the following road conditions. 9:49 AM . 4) Move the pedals toward you until you can fully depress the brake pedal by pushing the " " portion of the switch. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 12 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) Setting the driver's position 1) Be sure the parking brake is engaged. o With tire chains installed.p65 12 5/6/2005. Thus. ABS (ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. ! WARNING: NOTE: During ABS (ESC) operation. ABS will increase vehicle control during braking. o On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height. 2) Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position by pushing the " " portion of the switch. a noise may be heard in the engine compartment while braking. The ABS control module monitors the wheel speed and controls the pressure applied to each brake. you may not be able to hold down the brake pedal firmly in an emergency stop. During these conditions the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds: o Rough. 3) Adjust the seat position and the steering wheel angle properly. Otherwise. 5) Depress the pedals a few times to get used to the feel after adjusting. gravel or snow-covered roads.

If you turn the system off by pressing the ESC switch. ! CAUTION: Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions.p65 13 5/6/2005. make sure they are the same size as your original tires. Factors including speed. press the switch again. C310B01NF-AAT ESC ON/OFF Mode When the ESC is operating. In the ESC-OFF mode. all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery road surfaces should be observed. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety. NOTE: B310A01NF-A The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering manuevers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. To turn the system back on. Electronic stability control is only a driving aid. ESC applies the brakes at individual wheels and intervenes in the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle. the ESC-OFF indicator will come on and stay on. road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a ! WARNING: The ESC mode will automatically be turned ON after the engine is turned off and restarted. When replacing tires. The ESC-OFF indicator should go off. nfhma-2. 9:49 AM .DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 13 ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) SYSTEM C310A01NF-AAT (If Installed) loss of control. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Adjust your driving accordingly. the ESC indicator in the instrument cluster will blink. the stability control will be deactivated.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because it can result in the brakes overheating and losing their effectiveness. o After being parked. If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started. It also increases the wear of the brake components. o Use caution when parking on a hill. Should there be any unusual operation of the device while driving. Engage the parking brake and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). This is extremely hazardous. turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the car from rolling. nfhma-2. o If a tire goes flat while you are driving. They can also get wet when the car is washed. o If your car is equipped with an automatic transaxle. If your car is facing uphill. Keep the car in gear at all times. block the wheels. the ESC-OFF indicator illuminates as a warning. 9:49 AM . keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the car is stopped. such objects could move forward and cause damage to the vehicle or injure the occupants. o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. If the indicators do not illuminate. taking care to keep the car under control at all times. To dry the brakes. then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed. have your car checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer. apply the brakes gently and keep the car pointed straight ahead while you slow down. stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call your Hyundai dealer for assistance. have the vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. If there were an accident or a sudden stop. apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal. If your car is facing downhill. start the engine again to check if the ESCOFF indicator goes out. Wet brakes may cause the car to pull to one side. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so. or the ESC or ESC-OFF indicator does not go out after 3 seconds. To avoid creeping forward. use the brakes to slow down. drive your car to a safe place and stop the engine. pull off the road and stop in a safe place. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the car from rolling. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. o Driving through water may get the brakes wet. ! WARNING: Nothing should be carried on top of the shelf panel behind the rear seat. turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the car from rolling. o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear. don't let your car creep forward. Then.p65 14 5/6/2005. check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 14 C310D01NF-AAT GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES C130A01A-AAT Indicators and Warning The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should go out after three seconds. If the braking action does not return to normal. If the ESC-OFF indicator illuminates.

dirt. the more fuel your car uses. Incorrect inflation. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. 9:49 AM . o Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion. Driving at a moderate speed. especially on the highway. etc. o Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. In addition. which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze. o Take care of your tires. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your car. o Keep your car clean. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or fullthrottle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. For maximum service. If you drive your car in severe conditions. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. Accelerate at a moderate rate. either too much or too little. apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. If you are waiting (and not in traffic). o Keep your car in good condition. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. o Drive at a moderate speed. Try to adjust your speed to that of the other traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat. Weight reduces fuel economy. C140A01A-AAT You can save fuel and get more miles from your car if you follow these suggestions: o Drive smoothly. o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption. ice. o Travel lightly. This also reduces brake wear.p65 15 5/6/2005. Don't race between stoplights. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the car. maintain your car in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. your Hyundai should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. Then release the parking brake. o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs. It is especially important that mud. turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 15 DRIVING FOR ECONOMY o Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month. more frequent maintenance is required (see Section 5 for details). The faster you drive. nfhma-2.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 16 o Remember. SMOOTH CORNERING C150A01A-AAT WINTER DRIVING C160A01A-AAT Avoid braking or gear changing in corners. you should follow these suggestions: C160B01A-AAT Snowy or Icy Conditions To drive your vehicle in deep snow. To minimize the problems of winter driving. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide a greater driving force.p65 16 5/6/2005. especially when roads are wet. Also. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it. Check state laws before fitting tire chains. corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. 9:49 AM . it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. you can drive away. If this happens. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speeds. use engine braking to the fullest extent. During deceleration. and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. speeding. but will not prevent side skids. If snow tires are needed. give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period. tire wear will be held to a minimum. o Use your air conditioning sparingly. As soon as the engine is running smoothly. rapid acceleration. however. apply the brake gently. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Ideally. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. In very cold weather. NOTE: Tire chains are not legal in all states. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. sudden brake applications. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. nfhma-2. your Hyundai does not require extended warm-up. it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Furthermore. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle. shift to a lower gear. If you follow these suggestions. The more severe weather conditions of winter result in greater wear and other problems.

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if Necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Before winter. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If a lock is covered with ice. If the lock is frozen internally. C160H02A-AAT Use Approved Window Washer AntiFreeze in System To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing. See Section 9 for recommendations. have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter. you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use. add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in Section 6. To Keep Locks from Freezing To keep the locks from freezing. squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. C160F01A-AAT Check Spark Plugs and Ignition System Inspect your spark plugs as described in Section 6 and replace them if necessary. Window washer antifreeze is available from Hyundai dealers and most auto parts outlets. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by your Hyundai dealer or a service station. worn or damaged in any way. nfhma-2.p65 17 5/6/2005. consult your Hyundai dealer. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system. 9:49 AM . squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 17 C160C01A-AAT C160E01A-AAT C160G01A-AAT Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol Coolant Your Hyundai is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. C160D01A-AAT Check Battery and Cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system.

This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.p65 18 5/6/2005.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 18 C160I01L-AAT C160K01A-AAT HIGHER SPEED MOTORING C170A01A-AAT Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. sand. Carry Emergency Equipment Depending on the severity of the weather where you drive your car. gloves. C160J01A-AAT Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate Underneath Under some conditions. etc. flashlight. apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P" and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Do not forget to check both engine coolant and engine oil. nfhma-2. you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed. ground cloth. Drive belt: A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine. emergency flares. a window scraper. engine coolant and engine oil: High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. coveralls. tow straps or chains. a shovel. jumper cables. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires. Fuel. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen. Then release the parking brake. Pre-Trip Inspections 1. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze. you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains. 3. 9:49 AM . Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure. snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. a blanket. 2. Tires: Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. NOTE: Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly. C190C01Y-AAT Trailer Brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system. Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage. making sure that its location is compatible with that of the trailer or vehicle being towed. cars. See Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-6. or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. If you are considering towing with your car.000 km) in order to allow the engine to properly break in. nfhma-2. your car will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. you should first check with your State's Department of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal requirements. Trailer Hitches Select the proper hitch and ball combination. This enables you to be seen as well as to see. The hitch should be bolted securely to the car and installed by a qualified technician. Since laws vary from State to State the requirements for towing trailers. 9:49 AM . When driving during the day in conditions of poor visibility. Ask your Hyundai dealer for further details before towing.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 19 USE OF LIGHTS C180A01A-AAT TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING C190A01S-AAT C190B01S-AAT Check your lights regularly for correct operation and always keep them clean.200 miles (2. ! CAUTION: Do not do any towing with your car during its first 1.p65 19 5/6/2005. Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distributes the tongue load uniformly throughout the chassis. DO NOT USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY INSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER. it is helpful to drive with headlights on low beam. NOTE: If you tow a trailer or vehicle.

o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in excess of 12%) pay close attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the engine does not overheat. pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 20 C190E01NF-AAT ! Trailer Weight Limit CAUTION: NOTE: 1. The total gross vehicle weight is the combined weight of the vehicle.p65 20 5/6/2005. o Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system. This can be verified by checking the total weight of the loaded trailer and then checking the load on the tongue. all passengers and their luggage. To eliminate this potentially dangerous situation. If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the dial towards "H" (HOT). The total gross vehicle weight with trailer must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 82). About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half on the trailer and the remaining 40% in the rear. o Tongue load x 100 = 10% (MAX) Total trailer weight o Tongue loads can be increased or decreased by re-distributing the load in the trailer. Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight C190E01JM C190D01S-AAT Safety Chains Should the hitch connection between your car and the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail. driver. cargo. safety chains. You may proceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently. hitch. trailer tongue load and other optional equipment. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front. the trailer or vehicle could wander dangerously across other lanes of traffic and ultimately leave the roadway. attached between your car and the trailer or towed vehicle. nfhma-2. Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight C190E02JM 2. o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailer load. are required in most states. and allow the engine to idle until it cools down. 9:49 AM .

9:49 AM . Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.p65 21 5/6/2005. lbs(kg) Maximum Towable Weight With 3.4L Without Brake Trailer 2000 (900) 1500 (675) 1000 (450) Tongue 200 (90) - o Improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can seriously affect its steering and braking performance causing a crash which could cause serious injury or death. o Be careful when turning and while driving up and down hills. Before towing. o Be careful when driving in slippery and windy conditions. 6. brake lights. o Towing a trailer affects vehicle handling and braking. Improper trailer loading and/or too much luggage in the trunk can overload the rear axle. The vehicle/trailer combination is more affected by crosswind and buffeting.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 21 3. slow down to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence. C190F01Y-GAT ! Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips WARNING: 1. The loaded trailer weight cannot safely exceed the values in the chart below. o Drive more slowly when towing a trailer and allow more distance when braking. Low tire pressure can seriously affect the handling. 5. 4. nfhma-2. 7. (Less than 60 mph) 3. Redistribute the load and check the axle weight again. keep a constant speed and steer straight ahead. 2. If there is too much wind buffeting. Also check the spare tire. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal conditions. The front or rear axle weight must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. do not tow a trailer with the transaxle in fifth gear (manual transaxle). It is possible that your towing package does not exceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR. ! CAUTION: The following specifications are recommended when towing a trailer. When being passed by a large vehicle. check hitch and safety chain connections as well as proper operation of the trailer running lights.3L Brake 2. and turn signals. Check the condition and air pressure of all tires on the trailer and your car.

When ascending a long grade. do not hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator. I030A04NF-A The tire label located on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel gives the original tire size. Select a lower gear when going uphill. If the trailer has electric brakes. While in stop and go traffic. 12.p65 22 5/6/2005. Reduce highway speed. check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure. 11. and put the transaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park (automatic).Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently.During your trip. place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires. 15. set the parking brake firmly.If you have to stop while going uphill. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.Avoid jerky starts. downshift the transaxle to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. 13. Turn off the air conditioner. 14. 1. VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT C190F01JM-AAT Tire and Loading Information Label NOTE: When towing check transaxle fluid more frequently. 9:49 AM . shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes. 9. 2. start your vehicle and trailer moving. This could cause the brakes to overheat. sudden acceleration or sudden stops.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 22 8. cold tire pressures recommended for your ve- nfhma-2. taking the following action may reduce or eliminate the problem. In addition. This can cause the automatic transaxle to overheat. 3. place the gear selector in park or neutral and idle the engine at a higher speed. 4. (the temperature gauge reads near red zone). and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. be sure to follow all the normal precautions. Use the parking brake or footbrake. Turn your front wheel into the curb. 10. especially on a hill. resulting in reduced braking efficiency. ! CAUTION: I030A03NF-A If overheating should occur when towing.When going down a hill. When parking your car and trailer.

p65 23 5/6/2005. and there will be five 150 lb. (2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 23 hicle. if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. passengers in your vehicle. (6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer. 9:49 AM . That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.) (5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. (3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. Example 1 A B C C190F01JM Item A Description Vehicle Capacity Weight Total 1400 lbs (635 kg) Subtract Occupant Weight 300 lbs B 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 Available Cargo and C Luggage Weight (136 kg) 1100 lbs (489 kg) nfhma-2. the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight. For example. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1)Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds'' on your vehicle's placard. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs. (4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight. A B C C190F02JM A B C C190F03JM Item A Description Vehicle Capacity Weight Total 1400 lbs Item A Description Vehicle Capacity Weight Total 1400 lbs (635 kg) (635 kg) Subtract Occupant Weight 750 lbs B 150 lbs (68 kg) x 5 Available Cargo and C Luggage Weight (295 kg) (340 kg) 650 lbs C Available Cargo Weight B 172 lbs (78 kg) x 5 Subtract Occupant Weight 860 lbs (390 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) nfhma-2.p65 24 5/6/2005. The combined weight of the driver.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 24 Example 2 Example 3 Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. 9:49 AM .

all occupants. o A crash resulting from poor handling vehicle damage. o Overloading your vehicle can cause increased stopping distances that could lead to a crash. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). fuel and cargo. The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2 25 C190G02JM-AAT Compliance Label This label also tells you the maximum weights that can be supported by the front and rear axles. The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. ! WARNING: o Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure that could lead to a crash. Be sure to spread out your load equally on the left and right sides of the centerline. This could cause you to lose control and crash.p65 25 5/6/2005. WARNING: o Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. or increased stopping distances could result in serious injury or death. parts on your vehicle can break. ! nfhma-2. C190G01JM The compliance label is located on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel. If you do. o Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. and it can change the way your vehicle handles. you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles. called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). tire failure. Also. overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. 9:49 AM .

Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. or if there is a crash. ! nfhma-2. WARNING: Items you carry inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn. inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats.2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 26 NOTE: o Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. o Never stack items. tools. If you carry items inside your vehicle – like suitcases. Try to spread the weight evenly. o Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry. or in a crash. o Do not drive with a seat folded down unless necessary. o Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. like suitcases. 9:49 AM . o Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. or anything else – they move as fast as the vehicle goes.p65 26 5/6/2005. packages. secure it. the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger. If you have to stop or turn quickly. o When you carry something inside the vehicle. Do not overload your vehicle.

.... 3-6 Changing a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-2 Jump Starting ..... 10:46 AM ................ 3-3 If the Engine Overheats ............................................. 3-13 3 3 nfhma-3......p65 1 3/9/2005.............................................................. 3-11 Emergency Towing .........................................WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY If the Engine Will Not Start .............................. 3-6 If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed ................................................... 3-5 If You Have a Flat Tire ................... 3-13 If You Lose Your Keys ......... 3-4 Spare Tire ..................................................................................................................................

be sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P" and the emergency brake is set. 3. 2. 3. 4. push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to be overloaded and create a fire hazard.p65 2 3/9/2005. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment. keeping a straight line. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight. 3. do not push or pull the car to start it. the battery is discharged. 5.3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 2 IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT D010C02Y-AAT ! If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns Over Slowly WARNING: If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does Not Start 1. This could result in a collision or cause other damage. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers. Check fuel level. call a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance. If the engine still does not start. nfhma-3. Turn on the interior light. 4. If your car has an automatic transaxle. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place. 1. Try to start the engine again. contact a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance. If your vehicle will not start. If the engine will not start. coil and spark plugs. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened. Reduce your speed gradually. In addition. 10:46 AM . See instructions for "Jump Starting". D010D01A-AAT HNF5017 If Engine Stalls While Driving 1. check all connectors at ignition. With the key in the "OFF" position. 2.

attach one clamp to the negative (-) post or cable of the booster battery. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in the exact location shown on the illustration. attach one clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post or cable of the discharged battery.000 rpm. Start the engine in the car with the booster battery and let it run for a few minutes. If these instructions are not followed exactly. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery using the normal starting procedure. leave the jumper cables connected and let the engine run at fast idle or about 2. 6. During the jumping operation. o The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. o The battery being used to provide the jump start must be 12-volt. 10:46 AM . run the engine in this vehicle at about 2. using the other cable. If you do not know why your battery became discharged (because the lights were left on. If you must be transported to an emergency facility. be sure the two vehicles are not touching. This will help to assure that the booster battery is fully charged. Then attach the other end of that cable to a solid metal part of the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery away from the battery. have the charging system checked by your Hyundai dealer. seek qualified assistance. 3. wear protective glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself. Then attach the other end of the same cable to the positive (+) post or cable of the booster battery. your clothing or on the car. This is poisonous and highly corrosive. The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do not smoke or allow a spark or an open flame in the vicinity. Next. serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure. First.WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 3 JUMP STARTING D020A03A-AAT Discharged battery Booster battery HNF4001 ! WARNING: o If you should accidentally get acid on your skin or in your eyes. 4. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle. follow this procedure exactly: 1. Do not connect the cable to any moving part. Then promptly obtain medical attention.000 rpm for several minutes.p65 3 3/9/2005. o To jump start a car with a discharged battery.). If you cannot determine that it is a 12-volt battery. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. etc. nfhma-3. When jump starting. 5. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories in both vehicles. After the engine starts. continue to apply water to the affected area with a sponge or cloth. immediately remove any contaminated clothing and flush the area with clean water for at least 15 minutes. Carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment. do not attempt to use it for the jump start. 2.

check for coolant leaking from the radiator. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory. you should: 1. it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop). hoses or under the car. leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam. 3. wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. 6. This can allow coolant to be blown out of the opening and cause serious burns. nfhma-3. Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by a Hyundai dealer. turn the engine off. carefully add coolant to the reservoir (page 6-9) to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark. 4. If this happens. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so. or hear loud pinging or knocking. 10:46 AM . ! ! CAUTION: WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. keep hair. If the fan is not running. Then. If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out. If the air conditioning is on. call a Hyundai dealer for assistance. check to see that it is tight. ! WARNING: While the engine is running. Proceed with caution. turn it off. the engine is probably too hot. (If the air conditioning had been in use. stop the engine. you experience a loss of power.p65 4 3/9/2005. 2. 5. If it is not missing. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped.3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 4 IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS D030A02A-AAT If your temperature gauge indicates overheating. hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury. 7. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. if coolant has been lost. If overheating happens again. keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If engine coolant is running out under the car or steam is coming out from the hood. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating. stop the engine immediately and call the nearest Hyundai dealer for assistance.

o Do not use more than one temporary spare tire at a time. The temporary spare tire pressure should be checked once a month while the tire is stored. The tire pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tire is stored. wheel covers or trim rings be used with the temporary spare wheel. The temporary spare tire should not be used on any other wheels. 3. take out the tool receptacle and remove the installation bolt by turning it counterclockwise.WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 5 SPARE TIRE D040A02GK-AAT TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE The following instructions for the temporary spare tire should be observed: 1. D040B01NF-GAT Handling the Spare Tire HNF4008 2. The spare tire should only be used temporarily and should be returned to the luggage compartment as soon as the original tire can be repaired or replaced. 6. Continuous use at speeds of over 50 mph (80 km/h) is not recommended. CAUTION: o Do not use snow chains with your temporary spare tire. nor should standard tires. Spare Tire Pressure Tire Size Inflation Pressure T125/80 D16 420 KPA(60 PSI) 4.p65 5 3/9/2005. 5. nfhma-3. it should not be used on any other vehicle. tighten the bolt firmly with your fingers until there is no more play in the spare tire. damage to these items or other car components may occur. To replace the spare tire in its storage compartment. 10:46 AM . As the temporary spare tire is specifically designed for your car. Check inflation pressure as soon as practical after installing the spare tire. o Do not tow a trailer while the temporary spare tire is installed. and adjust to the specified pressure. snow tires. ! To remove the spare tire. If such use is attempted.

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 6 IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE D050A01A-AAT CHANGING A FLAT TIRE D060A01A-AAT D060B01NF-GAT If a tire goes flat while you are driving: 1. When the car is stopped. 1. brake carefully and pull off the road. Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the car slow down while driving straight ahead. Have all passengers get out of the car. do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes. then: D060B01NF-A Take out the tool receptacle and turn the installation bolt counterclockwise to remove spare tire from the trunk. set the parking brake and put the transaxle in "P" (automatic) or reverse (manual transaxle). If you are on a divided highway. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool D060A01NF-A The procedure described on the following pages can be used to rotate tires as well as to change a flat tire. turn on your emergency hazard flashers. 4.p65 6 3/9/2005. When preparing to change a flat tire. Change the tire according to the instructions provided as follows. 3. check to be sure the gear selector lever is in "P" (automatic transaxle) or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and that the parking brake is set. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. nfhma-3. When the car has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so. 10:46 AM . level ground. 2.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 7 D060C01A-AAT D060D01A-AAT D060E01A-AAT 2. push down on it with steady pressure.p65 7 3/9/2005. position the wrench so the handle is to the left as shown in the drawing. For maximum leverage. The jack should be positioned as shown in the drawing. 10:46 AM . while holding the wrench near the end of the handle. Put the Jack in Place HNF4009 HNF4011-A D060E01NF-A Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the flat to keep the vehicle from rolling when the car is raised on the jack. When doing this. be sure that the socket is seated completely over the nut so it cannot slip off. Block the Wheel Flat tire 3. Then. turn the wrench handle counterclockwise. Do not remove the nuts at this time. The base of the jack should be placed on firm. nfhma-3. Loosen Wheel Nuts 4. level ground. To loosen the nuts. The wheel nuts should be loosened slightly before raising the car. Just loosen them about one-half turn.

As the jack begins to raise the vehicle. place a board. WARNING: Do not get under the car when it is supported by the jack! This is very dangerous as the vehicle could fall and cause serious injury or death. To do this. No one should stay in the car while the jack is being used. Raising the Car Raise the car high enough so that the fully inflated spare tire can be installed.p65 8 3/9/2005. ! D060G01NF-A Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. nfhma-3.3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 8 D060F02E-AAT 5. brick. flat stone or other object under the base of the jack to keep it from sinking. you will need more ground clearance than is required to remove the flat tire. D060G02Y-AAT 6. To raise the vehicle. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs. line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult. turn the wheel nut wrench clockwise. To put the wheel on the hub. pick up the spare tire. If the jack is on soft ground or sand. 10:46 AM . double check that it is properly positioned and will not slip. Changing Wheels Wheel nut wrench Wrench bar HNF4025 After inserting a wrench bar into the wheel nut wrench. install the wrench bar into the jack as shown in the drawing. tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud.

10:46 AM .WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 9 D060H02O-AAT D060G02NF WARNING: If there is. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. gravel. remove it. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again. D060H01NF-A ! 7. the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel.p65 9 3/9/2005. hold it on the studs. nfhma-3. If there is not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel and hub. Reinstall Wheel Nuts WARNING: Wheels and wheel covers may have sharp edges. The nuts should be installed with their small diameter ends directed inward. tar. etc.) that interferes with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub. This may cause serious injury or death. ! To reinstall the wheel. put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated. be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud. Before putting the wheel into place.

HNF5016-A If you have a tire gauge. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. 10:46 AM . drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure.ft (900-1. adjust it until nfhma-3. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. After changing wheels.100 kg. Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.cm) D060J02O-AAT After Changing Wheels HNF4013-A D060I01NF Lower the car to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. If it is too high. If the pressure is lower than recommended. Then double-check each nut for tightness. remove the valve cap and check the air pressure.3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 10 D060I01E-AAT 8. Go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are all tight. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts Wheel nut tightening torque: Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 65-80 lb. have a technician tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.p65 10 3/9/2005.

air may leak from the tire. (2) or flatbed equipment (3). If you lose a valve cap. nfhma-3. Be sure that a safety chain system is used and that all local laws are observed. rather than risk damage to your car. In any case. be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. o When the engine will not start. 10:46 AM . Also. If the cap is not replaced. Towing the Vehicle 1) 2) ! 3) dolly CAUTION: o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed incorrectly! o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral. always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations. it is suggested that you show this information to the tow truck operator.p65 11 3/9/2005. After you have changed wheels. D080A01O-GAT D080B01O-GAT If your vehicle has to be towed. It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 11 IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE TOWED it is correct. This will help assure that your vehicle is not damaged in towing. buy another and install it as soon as possible. professionals are generally aware of local laws governing towing. it should be done by your Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow truck service. HNF4015 Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift type truck (1).

nfhma-3. A vehicle with an automatic transaxle should never be towed from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. o Manual Transaxle: If you do not use a towing dolly.3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 12 NOTE: ! CAUTION: o When towing the vehicle. 2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground. Before towing.p65 12 3/9/2005. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle. a towing dolly must be used. o Automatic Transaxle: Be sure to use a towing dolly under the front wheels. take care not to cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick. add fluid. 3) It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with all the wheels off the ground. check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. 10:46 AM . place the ignition key in the "ACC" position and put the transaxle in "N (Neutral)". use a towing dolly under the front wheels. be sure the parking brake is released. ! CAUTION: D080B01NF ! CAUTION: D080B02NF o Do not tow with sling type truck as this may cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle. Do not tow with the key removed or in the "LOCK" position when towing from the rear without a towing dolly. 1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear wheels on the ground. If you cannot add fluid.

drive train. check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. it can be towed only from the front. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes. 10:46 AM . A driver must be in the towed car to steer it and operate the brakes. steering or brakes are damaged. If you cannot add fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick. Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels. a towing dolly must be used. This could result in serious damage to your car. D120A01A-AAT If you lose your keys. attach a tow cable.p65 13 3/9/2005. Before towing. nfhma-3. many Hyundai dealers can make you a new key if you have your key number. chain or strap to the towing hook under the front of your car. Do not attempt to tow your vehicle in this manner on any unpaved surface.WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3 13 EMERGENCY TOWING D080D01NF-AAT IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS NOTE: Before towing. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground. be sure the transaxle is in neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engine off) or in the "ON" position (with the engine running). Do not tow at speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h) and for more than 15 miles (25 km). add fluid. If you lock the keys inside your car and you cannot obtain a new key. axles. many Hyundai dealers can use special tools to open the door for you. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position. ! D080D02NF-A CAUTION: For emergency towing when no commercial tow vehicle is available.

................................ 4-3 Cleaning the Interior ............................... 4-2 Washing and Waxing .......................p65 1 3/9/2005......................CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE Corrosion Protection ............................................ 10:45 AM 4 ............... 4-2 To Help Prevent Corrosion ... 4-5 4 nfhma-4...................................

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2

CORROSION PROTECTION
E010A01A-AAT E010C01A-AAT

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION
E020A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Corrosion
By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your Hyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

High-Corrosion Areas
If you live in an area where your car is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.
E010D01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your car clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important. o If you live in a high-corrosion area — where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your car at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over. o When cleaning underneath the car, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

Moisture Breeds Corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate. Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion. High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the car.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your car are: o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the car. o Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

nfhma-4.p65

2

3/9/2005, 10:45 AM

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

4
3

WASHING AND WAXING
o When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended. Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

E030A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai
Never wash your car when the surface is hot from being in the sun. Always wash your car in the shade. Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive and can scratch the paint if it is not removed. Air pollution or acid rain may damage the paint and trim through chemical action if pollutants are allowed to remain in contact with the surface. If you live near the ocean or in an area where road salts or dust control chemicals are used, you should pay particular attention to the underside of the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dust and loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driven through mud or muddy water, be sure to thoroughly clean the underside as well. Use a hard direct stream of water to remove accumulations of mud or corrosive materials. Use a good quality car-washing solution and follow the manufacturer's directions on the package. These are available at your Hyundai dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't use strong household detergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abrasive cleaning powders as these may damage the finish. Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequently and don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots, dampen them frequently and remove them a little at a time.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your car in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car. These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

nfhma-4.p65

3

3/9/2005, 10:45 AM

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4 To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush or soapy steel-wool scouring pad. To clean plastic wheel covers, use a clean sponge or soft cloth and water. To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mild soap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, polishing and waxing. Because aluminum is subject to corrosion, be sure to give aluminum alloy wheels special attention in winter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the wheels thoroughly afterwards. After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. If soapy water dries on the finish, streaking will result. When the weather is warm and the humidity low, you may find it necessary to rinse each section immediately after washing to avoid streaking. After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for drying the car is to remove water from the car so it will dry without water spots. Don't rub, this can damage the finish. If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint, use touch-up paint to cover them to prevent corrosion. To protect the paintwork of the car against corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai (at least once a month). Give special attention to the removal of salt, mud and other substances on the underside of the splashboards of the car. Make sure that the outlets and the underside of the doors are open. Paint damage can be caused by small accumulation of tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects and bird droppings, when not removed immediately. If water alone is not strong enough to remove the accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solution. Be sure to rinse the surface after washing to remove the solution. Never allow the solution to dry on the painted surfaces.
E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing
Always wash and dry the car before polishing or waxing or using a combination cleaner and wax. Use a good quality commercial product and follow the manufacturer's directions on the container. Polish and wax the bright trim pieces as well as the paint.

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again
You should polish and wax the car again when water no longer beads on a clean surface but spreads out over a larger area.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning
Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corrosive cleaning agents. These can damage the finish of the car. To remove road tar, use turpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle. To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution. Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lost its luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

nfhma-4.p65

4

3/9/2005, 10:45 AM

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

4
5

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
E030E01A-AAT E040A01A-AAT E040B01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers
Special precautions must be observed to preserve the appearance of the bumpers on your Hyundai. They are: o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte or hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If you do, wash it off immediately with clean water. o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper surfaces. They are made of soft plastic and the surface can be damaged if mistreated. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution. o Do not expose the bumpers to high temperatures. For example, if you have your car repainted, do not leave the bumpers on the car if the car is going to be placed in a hightemperature paint booth.

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery
To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then apply a solution of mild soap or detergent and water using a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipe with a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt stains are not removed, repeat this procedure until the upholstery is clean. Do not use gasoline, solvent, paint thinner or other strong cleaners.

To Clean the Leather Upholstery (If Installed)
In the normal course of use, leather upholstered surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it may work into the surface of the leather, causing damage. Fine leather needs care, and should be cleaned when necessary. Washing leather thoroughly with soap and water will keep your leather lustrous, beautiful and ensure you have many years of wear. Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mild soap and lukewarm water, work up a good lather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe clean with a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth. Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled. During tanning operations, sufficient oils are incorporated through processing that none need be applied during the life of the leather. Oil applied to the finished surface will in no way help the leather and may do more harm than good. Varnishes and furniture polishes should never be used under any conditions.

nfhma-4.p65

5

3/9/2005, 10:45 AM

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
6
E040C01A-AAT E040E01A-AAT

ANY QUESTIONS?
E050A01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets
Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners of this type are available in aerosol cans in liquid form or powder. Read the instructions and follow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleaner with the appropriate attachment, remove as much dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply the foam following the manufacturer's directions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add water. These cleaners work best when the carpet is kept as dry as possible.

Cleaning the Windows
You may use any household window cleaner on the windows. However, when cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to damage the rear window defroster wiring.

If you have any questions about the care of your car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or sponge with mild soap or detergent and warm water. Do not use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abrasive materials on the seat belts as this may weaken the fabric. While cleaning the belts, inspect them for excessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs of damage and replace them if necessary.

nfhma-4.p65

6

3/9/2005, 10:45 AM

..p65 1 4/28/2005........................ 5-4 Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ..............VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Maintenance Intervals ........................... 5-2 Scheduled Maintenance ........ 5-7 5 nfhma-5................. 5-6 Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items ....................... 8:58 AM 5 ..............

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS F010A01A-AAT F010B01A-AAT F010C01A-AAT Service Requirements To ensure that you receive the greatest number of miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai. nfhma-5. The Owner's Handbook supplied with your new vehicle provides further information about these warranties. Your Owner's Handbook provides further information about your warranty coverage. Maintenance Requirements The maintenance required for your Hyundai can be divided into three main areas: o Specified scheduled procedures o General checks o Do-it-yourself maintenance Specified Scheduled Procedures These are the procedures such as inspections. It is your responsibility to have these maintenance procedures performed to comply with the terms of the warranties covering your new Hyundai. 8:58 AM . engine coolant. It is suggested that genuine Hyundai service parts be used for any required repairs or replacements.p65 2 4/28/2005. Although careful design and engineering have reduced these to a minimum. adjustments and replacements that are listed in the maintenance charts starting on page 5-4. certain maintenance procedures must be performed. Other parts of equivalent quality such as engine oil. manual or auto transaxle oil. these procedures may be performed at any qualified service facility. brake fluid and so on which are not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company or its distributor may be used without affecting your warranty coverage but you should always be sure these are equivalent to the quality of the original Hyundai parts. those that are required are of the utmost importance. These procedures must be performed at the intervals shown in the maintenance schedule to assure that your warranty remains in effect. Although it is strongly recommended that they be performed by the trained technicians at your Hyundai dealer.

A copy of this publication may be purchased at your Hyundai dealer's parts department. o Receipts for all emission control system services should be retained to demonstrate compliance with conditions of the emissions system warranty. you may find it helpful to have an official Hyundai Shop Manual. F010E01A-AAT A Few Tips o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced. nfhma-5. you can inspect and service a number of items.000 miles (240. For more information about doing it yourself. keep copies of the service records in your glove box. o For severe usage maintenance requirements. continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.000 km). own a few tools that are required and want to take the time to do so. see Section 6. This will help ensure that you can document that the required procedures have been performed to keep your warranties in effect.VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5 3 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS F010D02A-AAT F010F01A-AAT F020A02Y-AAT General Checks These are the regular checks you should perform when you drive your Hyundai or you fill the fuel tank. o If you choose to do your own maintenance and repairs. o Inspection should be performed any time a malfunction is experienced or suspected. o After 120 months or 150. This is especially important when service is not performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Do-It-Yourself Maintenance If you are mechanically inclined.p65 3 4/28/2005. A list of these items will be found on page 6-4. see page 5-6 of this section. 8:58 AM .

5 120 127.5 105 112. FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS VACUUM AND CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP AIR CLEANER FILTER VALVE CLEARANCE SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED) FUEL TANK AIR FILTER ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL I R I I R I R I I I I I I I I I I R I I I I R R R R R R I I I I I I R I R I I R I R I I I I I R R R R R R I I I I I R I I I I I I R R R R R R I I I I R I I I I I I I I R R R R R R I I I R 7. the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty.5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE F030A01NF-AAT The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. F030B03NF-AAT R :Replace I : Inspect and. MILES X 1000 No. repair or replace if necessary. DESCRIPTION KILOMETERS X 1000 MONTHS EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER FUEL FILTER FUEL LINES. adjust.5 12 6 15 22.p65 4 4/28/2005. Where both mileage and time are shown.5 45 52.5 75 82. after Inspection. clean.5 60 67.5 90 97. 8:58 AM .5 30 37.5 135 142.5 150 24 12 36 18 48 24 60 30 72 36 84 42 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 nfhma-5.

UPPER ARM BALL JOINT POWER STEERING PUMP. FOR THE FIRST TIME. AFTER THAT.000 MILES (96. W/PUMP) COOLANT MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID BRAKE FLUID BRAKE HOSES AND LINES REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS.5 150 168 84 180 90 192 96 I 204 102 216 108 228 114 240 120 I GENERAL ITEMS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DRIVE BELT (AUTO-TENSIONER.000 KM) OR 60 MONTHS. WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R" nfhma-5. CALIPERS AND ROTORS EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS STEERING GEAR BOX.p65 5 4/28/2005. P/STR'G. REPLACE IT EVERY 30.5 36 18 30 48 24 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 37.000 KM) OR 24 MONTHS. repair or replace if necessary MILES X 1000 DESCRIPTION KILOMETERS X 1000 MONTHS 7. I : Inspect and.5 132 66 90 144 72 I 97. clean. after inspection.5 12 6 15 24 12 22. adjust.5 135 142. REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60.5 84 42 60 96 48 I See Note *1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I See Note *2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I R I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 67. PARKING BRAKE BRAKE PADS. LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM BALL JOINT.5 108 54 75 120 60 82.5 156 78 105 112.000 MILES (15. A/CON.VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5 5 F030C01NF-AAT R : Replace No. *2. ALT. 8:59 AM .000 MILES (48.000 KM).5 120 127. BELT AND HOSES DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) Note: *1. FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10.5 60 30 45 72 36 52.

UPPER ARM BALL JOINT DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID MAINTENANCE OPERATION R I R I I I I R R R MAINTENANCE INTERVALS EVERY 3. E.000 MILES (96. G. D.spread roads D . 8:59 AM . C. H DRIVING CONDITION A. muddy. F A.000 MILES (4.000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS EVERY 60. other commercial use or vehicle towing Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h) Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions nfhma-5.p65 6 4/28/2005. B. E B.Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances C . or mountain road Towing a Trailer. H C. H C. F. G. G. I SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS A . H. adjust.000 KM) MORE FREQUENTLY EVERY 30. graveled or salt.5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS F040A01NF-AAT The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS MORE FREQUENTLY MORE FREQUENTLY MORE FREQUENTLY MORE FREQUENTLY MORE FREQUENTLY EVERY 7. C. D. D. C. PARKING BRAKE STEERING GEAR BOX. taxi. F. E. E A. G. or using a camper. H. F. I C. R : Replace I : Inspect and.000 KM) C. E. repair or replace if necessary MAINTENANCE ITEM ENGINE OIL AND FILTER AIR CLEANER FILTER SPARK PLUGS BRAKE PADS. H. LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER ARM BALL JOINT. H. dusty. clean. E.500 MILES (12. after inspection. I. D. G. CALIPERS AND ROTORS REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS. D. or roof rack Driving as a patrol car. downhill.Driving in sandy areas F GHI J K- Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C) Driving on uphill. unpaved. I. E. F. K C.000 MILES (48.Driving on rough. G.Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather E .Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in normal temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing temperature B . J C. D.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5
7

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
F060M01A-AAT F060B01NF-GAT F060F01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter
The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

o Drive Belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension.

o Vacuum, Crankcase Ventilation Hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

F060C01A-AAT

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently. After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. Fuel filters should be installed by trained technicians.

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have a trained technician replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

nfhma-5.p65

7

4/28/2005, 8:59 AM

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
F060G01A-AAT F070C01A-AAT F070F01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

o Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

o Brake Hoses and Lines
Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

F070D01A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle Oil
F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter
A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.
F060J01A-AAT

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according to the maintenance schedule.

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.

NOTE:
If the oil level is low, check for possible leaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.

o Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.
F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid
The fluid level should be in the “HOT” range of the dipstick, after the engine and transaxle are at normal operating temperature. Check the automatic transaxle fluid level with the engine running and the transaxle in neutral, with the parking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co. when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrong ATF may result in damage to the ATM.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums and Linings/ Parking Brake
Check the rear brake drums and linings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables. For detailed service procedures, refer to the Shop Manual.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.

nfhma-5.p65

8

4/28/2005, 8:59 AM

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5
9

F070J01A-AAT

F070M01Y-AAT

F070Q01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/ Lower Arm Ball Joint, Upper Arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage. Check air conditioning performance according to the relevant shop manual if necessary.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses
F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts
Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

nfhma-5.p65

9

4/28/2005, 8:59 AM

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2 General Checks ............................................................ 6-4 Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5 Changing the Engine Oil and Filter ................................ 6-6 Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8 Spark Plugs ................................................................ 6-11 Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-14 Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-17 Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-18 Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-20 Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-21 Changing the Air Conditioner Filter ............................. 6-22 Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-24 Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-25 Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-27 Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-29 Headlight Aiming Adjustment ...................................... 6-30 Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-31 Bulb Wattages ............................................................. 6-38 Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-39

6

6

nfhma-6.p65

1

4/28/2005, 8:56 AM

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
2

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
G010B01NF-AAT

(2.4 DOHC)

!

CAUTION:

When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged.

G010B01NF

1. 2. 3. 4.

Coolant reservoir cap Engine oil filler cap Air cleaner Brake fluid reservoir

5. 6. 7. 8.

Fuse and relay box Windshield washer fluid reservoir Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil level dipstick

9. Automatic transaxle oil level dipstick (If Installed) 10. Radiator cap 11. Battery

nfhma-6.p65

2

4/28/2005, 8:56 AM

G010A01NF 1. Fuse and relay box Windshield washer fluid reservoir Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil level dipstick 9. Radiator cap 11.p65 3 4/28/2005. 7. Battery nfhma-6. 3. 2.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 3 G010A01NF-AAT (3.3 V6) ! CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine. Coolant reservoir cap Engine oil filler cap Air cleaner Brake fluid reservoir 5. 8:56 AM . 6. Automatic transaxle oil level dipstick 10. 4. you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic cover of the engine is not damaged. 8.

including "Park" mechanism operation Seat control condition and operation Seat belt condition and operation Sun visor operation If you notice anything that does not operate correctly or appears to be functioning correctly. heating system operation (and air conditioning.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 4 GENERAL CHECKS G020A01NF-AAT G020B01A-AAT G020C01A-AAT Engine Compartment The following should be checked regularly: o o o o o o o o o o o o Engine oil level and condition Transaxle fluid level and condition Brake fluid level Engine coolant level Windshield washer fluid level Accessory drive belt condition Engine coolant hose condition Fluid leaks (on or below components) Power steering fluid level Battery condition Air filter condition Engine vibration Vehicle Exterior The following should be checked monthly: o o o o o o o o o o Overall appearance and condition Wheel condition and wheel nut torque Exhaust system condition Light condition and operation Windshield glass condition Wiper blade condition Paint condition and body corrosion Fluid leaks Door and hood lock condition Tire pressure and condition (including spare tire) Vehicle Interior The following should be checked each time when the vehicle is driven: o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Lights operation Windshield wiper operation Horn operation Defroster. 8:56 AM . including clutch operation Automatic transaxle operation. if installed) Steering operation and condition Mirror condition and operation Turn signal operation Accelerator pedal operation Brake operation.p65 4 4/28/2005. inspect it carefully and seek assistance from your Hyundai dealer if service is needed. nfhma-6. including parking brake Manual transaxle operation.

Then note the highest level the oil has reached on the dipstick. ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE G030C01NF ! WARNING: Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you. It should be between the upper ("F") and lower ("L") range. G030B01JM-U The engine oil quality should meet the following classification. fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw it again. o If SAE 5W-20.3L) Engine oil is essential to the performance and service of the engine.4L) G030C02NF Before checking the oil. API SJ. G030B01O-AAT Recommended Oil G030C01JM-AAT To Check the Oil Level (2. secondary recommended engine oil for corresponding temperature range can be used. Turn the engine off. Wait five minutes. warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature and be sure your car is parked on level ground. ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is not available.p65 5 4/28/2005. wipe it off. (3. then remove the dipstick. It is suggested that you check the oil level at least once a week in normal use and more often if you are on a trip or driving in severe conditions.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 5 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL G030A01A-AAT NOTE: o For good fuel economy. nfhma-6. ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferred regardless of regional option and engine variation. 8:56 AM . SL or ABOVE. SAE 5W-20 (5W30).

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 6 G030D01O-AAT CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Adding Oil (2. Do not overfill to avoid damage to the engine. To add oil: nfhma-6. The distance between the "F" and "L" marks is equal to about 1 quart of oil.3L) Oil filter ! WARNING: Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you. 3.4L) 1. Oil filler cap Oil level dipstick G040A01NF G030D02NF If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark.p65 6 4/28/2005.3L) (3.4L) Oil filler cap ! G030D01NF CAUTION: Oil filter HNF5005 Slowly pour the recommended oil into a funnel. Add oil. then check the level again. 8:56 AM . (3. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise. 2. G040A01NF-AAT (2. Do not overfill.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
7

The engine oil and filter should be changed at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required. The procedure for changing the oil and filter is as follows: 1. Park the car on level ground and set the parking brake. Start the engine and let it warm up until the needle on the coolant temperature gauge moves above the lowest mark. Turn the engine off and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse gear (manual transaxle). 2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil filler cap.

(2.4L)

HNF5006-1

HNF5005-1

NOTE:
Loosen the oil filter cap by turning it counterclockwise to drain well the oil in the oil filter (3.3L only).

3. Slide underneath the car and loosen the drain plug by turning it counterclockwise with a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it drains out, then remove the drain plug.

(3.3L)

!

WARNING:

Be very careful when draining the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you! 4. When the oil has stopped draining, replace the drain plug using a new gasket and retighten by turning it clockwise. Oil pan drain plug tightening torque: 25.3 ~ 32.5 lb.ft (3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m)

G040B01NF

nfhma-6.p65

7

4/28/2005, 8:56 AM

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
8 5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise with a oil filter wrench of the proper size. A certain amount of oil will come out when you remove the filter. So be sure to have your drain pan in place underneath it. 6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the instructions on the carton or on the filter itself. Do not over-tighten. Tightening torque: 8.7 ~ 11.6 lb.ft (1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m) Be sure that the mounting surface on the engine is clean and that the old gasket is removed completely. Lubricate the new gasket on the filter with clean engine oil before installation. 7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick. 8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended engine oil. Refer to the specification in chapter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CHECKING AND CHANGING THE ENGINE COOLANT NOTE:
Always dispose of used engine oil in an environmentally acceptable manner. It is suggested that it be placed in a sealed container and taken to a service station for reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the ground or put it into the household trash.
G050A01A-AAT

!

WARNING:

!

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the engine coolant is under pressure and may erupt through the opening if the cap is removed. You could be seriously burned if you do not observe this precaution. Do not remove the radiator cap until the radiator is cool to the touch.

!

CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil into a funnel. Do not overfill to avoid damage to the engine. 9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter. 10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

nfhma-6.p65

8

4/28/2005, 8:56 AM

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
9

G050B01A-AAT

G050C01NF-GAT

G050D01NF-GAT

Recommended Engine Coolant
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a 50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant should be compatible with aluminum engine parts. Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives should not be used. The cooling system must be maintained with the correct concentration and type of engine coolant to prevent freezing and corrosion. Never allow the concentration of antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go below the 35% level, or damage to the cooling system may result. For proper concentration when adding or replacing the engine coolant, refer to the following table.

To Check the Coolant Level

To Change the Engine Coolant
The engine coolant should be changed at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

!

CAUTION:

G050C01NF

Ambient Engine Coolant concentration temperature Antifreeze Water °F (°C) solution 65% 5 (-15) 35% 60% -13 (-25) 40% 50% -31 (-35) 50% 40% -49 (-45) 60%

The coolant level can be seen on the side of the plastic coolant reservoir. The level of the coolant should be between the "L" and "F" lines on the reservoir when the engine is warm with it at idle . If the level is below the "L" mark, add engine coolant to bring it up to "F". If the level is low, inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluid level frequently. If the level drops again, visit your Hyundai dealer for an inspection and diagnosis of the reason.

o Engine coolant can damage the finish of your car. If you spill engine coolant on the car, wash it off thoroughly with clean water. o The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol base coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing. Do not use hard water. Hard water can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. 1. Park the car on level ground, set the parking brake and remove the radiator cap when cool.

nfhma-6.p65

9

4/28/2005, 8:56 AM

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
10

HNF5008

G050D02NF-A

G050D01NF

2. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap and slowly turn the radiator cap counterclockwise without pressing down on it, until it stops. This relieves any pressure remaining in the cooling system. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise.

3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place. Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow all the engine coolant to drain from the cooling system, and then securely close the drain cock. 4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of the cooling system in your car. Then, following the manufacturer's directions on the engine coolant container, add the appropriate quantity of coolant to the radiator. 5. Slowly fill the radiator with the proper coolant mixture (see the "Recommended Engine Coolant in previous page) until the fluid level stays up in the radiator neck. And pump the radiator hose in order to bleed the air.

6. Run the engine at idle until the coolant circulates. If the cooling fan operates and the coolant starts to circulate, add the coolant to the reservoir. 7. To bleed the air in the cooling system, repeat procedure 6 until the cooling fan operates 3~5 times. 8. Replace the radiator cap and turn it until tightly installed. And then, add coolant to the reservoir until the level is between "L" and "F". 9. Stop the engine and check the coolant level when the engine is cool. The level of the coolant should be the "L" and "F" lines on the reservoir. If the level is below the "L" line, repeat the procedure 4~8 until the level between "L" and "F".

nfhma-6.p65

10

4/28/2005, 8:56 AM

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
11

SPARK PLUGS
10.Replace the reservoir cap and check to be sure the drain cock and the radiator cap are fully closed and not leaking.
G060A01NF-AAT G060B01NF-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs
The spark plugs should be changed at the intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5 or whenever engine performance indicates they should be changed. Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug performance include engine misfiring under load, loss of fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. When spark plugs are replaced, always use spark plugs recommended by Hyundai. The use of other spark plugs can result in loss of performance, radio interference or engine damage.
G060A01L

CAUTION:

Recheck after a few days and add the coolant if the level is below the "L" level.

!

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the coolant fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0~1.1 mm)

!

Your engine was originally equipped with Iridium-tipped spark plugs. Iridium-tipped spark plugs will last longer than conventional type spark plugs and can be identified by blue lines on the ceramic shell.

NOTE:
When replacing the spark plugs, always use the genuine parts recommended.

Recommended Spark Plugs: Type SK16PR-A11 IFR5G-11 Remark 2.4L 3.3L

NOTE:
Do not clean or regap Iridium-tipped spark plugs.

nfhma-6.p65

11

4/28/2005, 8:56 AM

Remove the cover of the ignition connector with a flat-head screwdriver. nfhma-6. 5. This helps avoid getting the wires mixed up. Using a clean cloth.p65 12 4/28/2005. 2. (2) (1) NOTE: It is recommended that the spark plugs for 3. Pull the ignition connector key in the direction of (1). 8:56 AM . remove any dirt that has accumulated around the base of the spark plug so it cannot fall into the cylinder when the spark plug is removed. Press the position (2) of the ignition connector key and detach the ignition connector by pulling it. Always change one spark plug at a time.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 12 G060C01NF-GAT Changing the Spark Plugs You will find it easier to change spark plugs if the engine is cold. 1.3L engines be changed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. G060C01NF G060C02NF 3. 4. Remove the engine cover.

the spark plug or the engine itself. It is recommended that the engine be cool or cold when changing the spark plugs. If the engine is hot. When preparing to remove the spark plug. ! WARNING: 10. turn the wrench handle in a counterclockwise direction. 7. Pull straight up on the ignition coil (4). 8:56 AM . Remove the mounting bolt (3) of the ignition coil with a socket wrench. guide the socket down over the spark plug. 8. To install the new spark plug. To remove the spark plug. 9. nfhma-6. you could burn yourself on the insulated connector. being careful not to damage the ceramic insulator.p65 13 4/28/2005.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 13 (3) (4) G060C03NF G060C06NF G060C05NF 6. being careful not to damage the ceramic insulator. guide the socket down over the spark plug.

leaving them too loose can cause the spark plug to get very hot and possibly result in damage to the engine. These may result in damage to the air cleaner filter. Also.m)) Over-tightening can damage the threads in the aluminum cylinder head. 8:56 AM . be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake.ft (2. 2. Unsnap the clips around the cover. G060C04NF 11. nfhma-6. the old filter removed and the new filter put in its place.5 kgf. When this is done. the cover can be lifted off. NOTE: Spark plugs should be tightened firmly.p65 14 4/28/2005.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 14 CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER FILTER G070A03Y-AAT ! CAUTION: o Operating your vehicle without using a proper air cleaner filter in place can result in excessive engine wear. HNF5011 The replacement of the air cleaner filter is performed in the following manner. o When removing the air cleaner filter. 1. Genuine Hyundai replacement parts are recommended.0 lb. (Tightening torque: 18. Installation is the reverse order of disassembly.

raise the wiper to the vertical position. o Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil. gasoline. To remove the wiper blade HHR5049 G080A01NF-A The wiper blades should be carefully inspected from time to time and cleaned to remove accumulations of road film or other debris. If the wipers continue to streak or smear the glass. This can result in more rapid wear of the wiper blades and may scratch the glass. 2. use a clean sponge or cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water. (1) HHR5048 ! 1. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull it up. replace them with genuine Hyundai replacement parts or their equivalent. CAUTION: o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass. To clean the wiper blades and arms. etc.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 15 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES G080A02A-AAT G080B01HR-GAT Replacing the Wiper Blades To replace the wiper blades. 8:56 AM . Push down the wiper blade with the locking clip (1) pressed to detach it from the wiper arm.p65 15 4/28/2005. nfhma-6.

G090A01NF (3.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 16 FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR To install the wiper blade G090A02NF-AAT (2. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lower the wiper blade at the level of the wiper arm as shown in the drawing. 2. nfhma-6. G090A02NF The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the windshield washer system.p65 16 4/28/2005.3L) NOTE: Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield.4L) HHR5051 HHR5050 1. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear an audible "click" to engage in the end of the wiper arm. 8:56 AM .

S. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir.p65 17 4/28/2005. 8:56 AM .DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 17 CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL (MANUAL) A good quality washer fluid should be used to fill the washer reservoir.0 liters). o Windshield washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. HNF5010 Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxle should be checked at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.9 liters). Do not drink windshield washer fluid.0 U.S. you should exercise great caution to avoid burning yourself on hot engine or exhaust parts. The fluid level should be checked more frequently during bad weather or whenever the washer system is in more frequent use.2 U. This can damage the washer fluid pump. Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is 2. G100A01NF-AAT ! Drain plug Filler plug WARNING: It is always better to check the transaxle oil level when the engine is cool or cold. quarts (1. ! WARNING: Recommended Oil Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) in the manual transaxle. nfhma-6. ! CAUTION: o Radiator antifreeze (engine coolant) should not be used in the washer system because it will damage the car's finish. o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Serious injury or death could occur. o The washer lever should not be pulled and the washer should not be operated if the washer reservoir is empty. If the engine is hot. The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3. Damage to the vehicle or its occupants could occur. quarts (4.

2.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 18 G100B02A-AAT CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE FLUID (AUTOMATIC) G110A01E-AAT G110B05A-AAT To Check the Manual Transaxle Fluid Level Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle should be checked at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5. To refill the transaxle or bring the oil level up. NOTE: Automatic transaxle fluid is basically red in color. add oil slowly until it reaches the proper level. loosen the oil filler plug by turning it counterclockwise and remove it with your fingers. It is a normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace based upon the changing color. Using a wrench of the correct size.. G100B01L ! CAUTION: Park the car on level ground with the engine off. As driving distance increases.. You must replace the automatic transaxle fluid in accordance with intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in section 5. 1. SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co. The oil level should be at its bottom edge. DIAMOND ATF SP III. Replace the plug and washer. check for leaks before adding oil. Do not overfill. Use of aftermarket ATF additives may cause damage to the automatic transaxle. DIAMOND ATF SP III. SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co. Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III. nfhma-6. screw it in with your fingers and then tighten securely with the wrench. Use your finger to feel inside the hole. 3. Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehicle limited warranty. If it is not.p65 18 4/28/2005. If you are having your vehicle serviced at a facility other than a Hyundai dealer. 8:56 AM . the fluid color turns darkish red gradually. verify that the correct ATF is used for your vehicle. Recommended Fluid Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III.

quarts (10. With the engine still idling: 1.24 U. This means that the engine.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 19 G110C01NF-AAT G110D02O-AAT Transaxle Fluid Capacity The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is: 2. ! WARNING: G110D01NF The transaxle fluid level should be checked when the engine is at normal operating temperature. Remove the transaxle dipstick.4L 3. nfhma-6. wipe it clean.9 liters) To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level Park the car on level ground with the parking brake engaged. are very hot. radiator hose. apply the brakes and move the gear selector lever from "P" to each of its other positions — "R". "D" — and then return to "N" or "P". long hair and clothing clear of any moving parts. While the engine is idling. C090F02NF 2.p65 19 4/28/2005. quarts (7. being careful to keep hands. Open the hood.3L 8. When the transaxle fluid level is checked.8 liters) 11. the transaxle fluid should be at normal operating temperature and the engine idling.52 U. then remove it again.S.. It should be in the "HOT" range on the dipstick. "N". Exercise great care not to burn yourself during this procedure. exhaust system etc. Now check the fluid level on the dipstick.S. 8:56 AM . radiator. reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go.

the fan will automatically shut off. It will also damage your vehicle's paint if spilled on it and not removed immediately. Do not overfill.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 20 CHECKING THE BRAKES G120A01A-AAT G120C02A-AAT Recommended Brake Fluid ! Fluid level should be within "HOT" range CAUTION: Because brakes are essential to the safe operation of the car. If the transaxle fluid level is low. nfhma-6. As the engine coolant temperature decreases. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. It can damage your vision if it gets into your eyes. G120D01A-AAT To Check the Fluid Level The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should be checked periodically. G120B01A-AAT Checking the Brake Fluid Level ! WARNING: ! WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. 8:56 AM . it is suggested that they be checked and inspected by your Hyundai dealer. carefully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". This is a normal condition. The brakes should be checked and inspected for wear at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.p65 20 4/28/2005. The level should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. G110D02NF 3. If the level is at or below the "MIN" mark. use a funnel to add transaxle fluid through the dipstick tube until the level reaches the "HOT" range. Do not overfill. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your braking system. Follow the instructions printed on the container. Use caution when handling brake fluid.

! WARNING: Handle brake fluid carefully. When removing such accumulations. leaves. have the air conditioning system inspected by your Hyundai dealer. Do not allow the fluid can or reservoir to remain open any longer than required. 8:56 AM . This is particularly important during cool weather when the air conditioning system is not otherwise in use. To add brake fluid. These can interfere with maximum cooling efficiency. nfhma-6. ! CAUTION: Running the air conditioning system for extended periods of time with a low refrigerant level may damage the compressor. Lubrication To lubricate the compressor and the seals in the system. Slowly pour the recommended fluid into the reservoir. brush or hose them away carefully to avoid bending the cooling fans. This will prevent entry of dirt and moisture which can damage the brake system and cause improper operation. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is not cold. the air conditioning should be run for at least 10 minutes each week. dead insects.p65 21 4/28/2005. Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a sealed container. 2. Carefully replace the cap on the reservoir and tighten. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle for several minutes with the air conditioning set at the maximum cold setting. It can damage your vision if it gets into your eyes. G140B01A-AAT HNF5013 Checking the Air Conditioning Operation 1. etc. Do not overfill.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 21 AIR CONDITIONING CARE G120E02A-AAT G140A01A-AAT G140C01A-AAT Adding Brake Fluid Keeping the Condenser Clean The air conditioning condenser (and engine radiator) should be checked periodically for accumulation of dirt. first wipe away any dirt then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap.

1. Remove the cover (1) which is located to the right side of the instrument panel by pulling it. It helps to decrease the amount of pollutants entering the car. ! HNF2163-1 CAUTION: Be careful not to damage filter fixing clips. HNF2163 HNF2164 3. Remove the air conditioner filter cover by pressing both side clips. 4. Pull the glove box cylinder (2) to unlock the glove box retainer. 8:56 AM . Lower the glove box down completely by pushing both sides of the glove box inward. 2.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 22 CHANGING THE AIR CONDITIONER FILTER B145A01NF-AAT (For Evaporator and Blower Unit) (If Installed) The air conditioner filter is located in the right side of the instrument panel. nfhma-6.p65 22 4/28/2005.

(6~13 mm) 1. The free-play should be within the limits specified in the illustration. Installation is the reverse order of disassembly. This is the clutch pedal free-play. (30 mm) HNF2165 5. With the engine off.24~0. Use very light finger pressure and be sensitive to changes in resistance that mark the limits of the free-play. 6.p65 23 4/28/2005. Replace the air conditioner filter by lifting it. nfhma-6. be sure to properly install the air conditioner filter. have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary. If the free-play is greater than specified. If it is not. 8:56 AM .18 in.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 23 CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY G150A01A-AAT G160A01A-GAT STEERING WHEEL CLUTCH PEDAL 0.51 in. stop the car with the wheels pointed straight ahead and gently move the steering wheel back and forth. press lightly on the clutch pedal until you feel a change in resistance. HNF5018 G160A01HR ! CAUTION: To prevent pollutants from entering the car. To check the steering wheel free-play. have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

press down on the brake pedal several times to reduce the vacuum in the brake booster. press down slowly on the brake pedal until you feel a change in resistance.31 in. (3 ~ 8 mm) Water pump pully Damper pulley G180A01L G160A01HR COMP G140D01NF With the engine off. have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary. using your hand. have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary. (75 mm) 0. With the engine running. This is the brake pedal free-play.p65 24 4/28/2005.4L) Power steering Auto tensioner Generator 2. If the brake pedal clearance is not within the limits specified in the illustration. Then.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 24 G170A01A-AAT CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL CLEARANCE G180A01A-AAT CHECKING DRIVE BELTS G190A02NF-GAT BRAKE PEDAL (2. have your helper press down on the brake pedal several times and then hold it down with a force of about 110 lbs (50 kg. 8:56 AM . (3. If it is not. You need a helper to check the brake pedal clearance.3L) Water pump pully Generator Auto tensioner Power steering Damper pulley COMP G140D02NF nfhma-6.95 in. 490 N). The free-play should be within the limits specified in the illustration above.12 ~ 0. The brake pedal clearance is the distance from the top surface of the brake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under the floor mat.

This could result in serious damage and create a fire hazard. belts should be examined for cracks. (This could be caused by a short in the system drawing too much current. never use anything but a new fusible link with the same or lower amperage rating. When a new belt is replaced. Belt routing should also be checked to be sure there is no interference between the belts and other parts of the engine.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 25 CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension. Never use a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link. have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause. wear. repair the system and replace the fusible link. HNF4004 A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits from the battery are ever overloaded. At the same time. G200A01A-AAT Replacing a Fusible Link ! CAUTION: When replacing a fusible link. 8:56 AM . The fusible links are located in a relay box in the engine compartment for easy inspection. fraying or other evidence of deterioration and replaced if necessary. nfhma-6. thus preventing damage to the entire wiring harness.) If this ever happens. the belt should be located within the pulley of flat idler. NOTE: Drive belt tension is adjusted automatically by the auto tensioner.p65 25 4/28/2005.

8:56 AM . The fuse should be a snug fit. have the fuse clip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer. ! G200B02NF CAUTION: find one that appears to have burned out. If the fuse has burned out.p65 26 4/28/2005. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new fuse of the same rating into place. Be sure to check all other fuses even if you Good Burned out G200B02L G200B01NF-A The fuse box for the lights and other electrical accessories will be found on the left side of the instrument panel. If you do not have a spare fuse. you will see that the metal strip inside the fuse has burned through. If you suspect a blown fuse. follow this procedure: 1. 3. the problem is serious and should be referred to a Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and repair. If you replace a fuse and it blows as soon as the accessory is turned on. a blown fuse could be the reason. If any of your car's lights or other electrical accessories stop working. If it is not. Never replace a fuse with anything except a fuse with the same or a lower amperage rating. Turn off the ignition and all other switches. A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and create a fire hazard. Always remember to replace the borrowed fuse.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 26 G200B01NF-GAT Replacing Accessory Fuse 2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse. you may be able to borrow a fuse of the same or lower rating from an accessory you can temporarily get along without (the radio or cigarette lighter. NOTE: See page 6-39 for the fuse panel descriptions. Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you (a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in the relay and fuse box of the engine room to simplify this operation). 4. A burned-out fuse indicates that there is a problem in the electrical circuit. for example). nfhma-6. Inside the box you will find a list showing the circuits protected by each fuse.

immediately do the following: While batteries are being charged (either by a battery charger or by the vehicle's generator). Get medical assistance as soon as possible. After the battery terminals are dry. ! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING: ! WARNING: Batteries can be dangerous! When working with batteries. rinse out your eyes with water and get medical assistance as soon as possible. HNF5017 G210B04A-AAT Checking the Battery Keep the battery clean. eat a raw egg or drink vegetable oil. sparks or smoking in the area. continue to rinse your eyes by using a sponge or soft cloth saturated with water. chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. o If you swallow battery fluid. terminals. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or the car. cover them with a light coating of grease. which is poisonous and highly corrosive. Always observe these warnings to prevent injuries from occurring: o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated area. o Do not permit flames. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself. flush the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. nfhma-6. they produce explosive gases. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer. carefully observe the following precautions to avoid serious injuries. 8:56 AM . drink a large quantity of water or milk followed by milk of magnesia. The fluid in the battery contains a strong solution of sulfuric acid.p65 27 4/28/2005. While you are being driven to get medical assistance.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 27 CHECKING THE BATTERY G210A01A-AAT o If battery fluid is on your skin. o If battery fluid is in your eyes. and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. o Keep children away from the area. Battery posts. Wash hands after handling. Any evidence of corrosion around the battery posts or terminals should be removed using a solution of household baking soda and warm water.

nfhma-6. This is a normal condition. Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. o Never attempt to charge the battery when the battery cables are connected. o The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. clothing or paint finish.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 28 CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLING FANS G220A01A-AAT ! WARNING: Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery. 8:56 AM . Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin. As the engine coolant temperature decreases the fan will automatically shut off. If you feel a pain or a burning sensation. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan. so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space. ! WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running.p65 28 4/28/2005. If any electrolyte gets into your eyes. flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. get medical attention immediately. is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited. thoroughly wash the contacted area. excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Hydrogen. Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery. Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery. ! WARNING: If electrolyte gets on your skin. Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switched on. G220B01NF-GAT Checking Engine Cooling Fan The engine cooling fan should come on automatically if the engine coolant temperature is high or whenever the air conditioning is in operation. o When lifting a plastic-cased battery. continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth until medical attention is received. which is a highly combustible gas. If possible. resulting in personal injury. eyes.

It is due to a power steering fluid characteristic in extremely cold conditions. then check nfhma-6. scuffing or worn spots.p65 29 4/28/2005.4°F).DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 29 POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL G230A03A-AAT FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR HYUNDAI to make certain that the power steering fluid level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir. This is the same manual used by dealership technicians and while it is highly technical it can be useful in obtaining a better understanding of your car and how it works. pulling. The power steering hoses should be replaced if there is severe surface cracking. To check the power steering fluid level. be sure the engine is "OFF".3L) Recommended Fluid Use PSF-3 type fluid NOTE: Do not start the engine when the power steering oil reservoir is empty. Deterioration of the hose could cause premature failure. there is no abnormal function in the system. G230A02NF The power steering fluid level should be checked regularly. (3. G250A01A-AAT (2. G240A01A-AAT POWER STEERING HOSES It is suggested that you check the power steering hose connections for fluid leakage at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5. 8:56 AM .4L) NOTE: Grinding noise from the power steering pump may be heard immediately after the engine is started in extremely cold conditions (below . G230A01NF If you desire additional information about maintaining and servicing your Hyundai. you may purchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundai dealer's parts department. If the noise stops during warm up.

G290B01NF-AAT Adjustment After Headlight Assembly Replacement 0. Dotted lines in the illustration show the center of the headlights. 1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure. make sure of the following. Clean the headlight lenses and turn on the headlights (Low beam). Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. Place the vehicle on level ground and press the front bumper & rear bumper down several times. 5. 3. Ground line G260B01GK Vertical aiming If the vehicle has had front body repair and the headlight assembly has been replaced. engine oil and fuel. Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver's seat. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the parallel line with a phillips screwdriver VERTICAL AIMING. G290A01NF-A nfhma-6. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant. And then. the headlight aiming should be checked using the aiming screen as shown in the illustration.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 30 HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT G290A02O-AAT Before performing aiming adjustment.8 in.8 in. 7.p65 30 4/28/2005. draw a parallel line at 0. 2. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is parallel to the center line of the body and is aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration. (3m) from the test wall. and tools). 8:57 AM . 1. 4. 6. (21 mm) under the horizontal line. Draw a vertical line (through the center of each headlight beam pattern) and a horizontal line (through the center of each headlight beam pattern) on the aiming screen.(21 mm) Vertical line W Horizontal line "P" H ! Cut-off line WARNING: L H Horizontal aiming should be adjusted by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Open the hood. jack. and spare tire. 2. Turn on the headlight switch (Low Beam Position).

2. HEADLIGHT.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 31 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS SPECIFICATION: "H" Horizontal center line of headlights from ground : 26. Wear eye protection. FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT AND FRONT FOG LIGHT Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light Headlight (High beam) Headlight (Low beam) ! CAUTION: o Keep the lights out of contact with petroleum products. be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF" position.306mm) "L" Distance between the headlights and the wall that the lights are tested against : 118. Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same number and wattage rating. See page 6-38 for the wattage descriptions. etc. Open the engine hood. avoid touching the glass. nfhma-6. 8:57 AM . The next paragraph shows how to reach the light bulbs so they may be changed. (679mm) "W" Distance between each headlight center : 51.000 mm) G260A01L-GAT G270A01NF-AAT Before attempting to replace a light bulb. 3. o Be sure to replace the LED type equipped bulbs with an assembly.11 in.73 in. Front Fog Light Turn signal light (Front position light) G260A01NF-A Replacement instructions: 1. (3. (1.41 in. Allow the bulb to cool. such as oil. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base. gasoline.p65 31 4/28/2005.

Use the protective cap and carton to promptly dispose of the old bulb. HNF5027 Remove the protective cap from the replacement bulb and install the new bulb by matching the plastic base with the headlight hole. Reattach the bulb spring and reconnect the connector. Using a socket wrench of the correct size. 9. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlight bulb.p65 32 4/28/2005. 8.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 32 5. 8:57 AM . HNF5025 6. remove the headlight assembly mounting bolts. 11. HNF5024 HNF5026 nfhma-6. Disconnect the connector from the bulb base in the back of the headlight. Check for proper headlight aim. Disconnect the power cord from the back of the headlight. 7. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwise and remove it. HNF5023 4. 10.

p65 33 4/28/2005. Remove the cover on the inside of the rear luggage trim by turning the knob counterclockwise.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 33 G270D01NF-AAT ! REAR COMBINATION LIGHT WARNING: Stop/Tail Light. To replace the front turn signal light bulb (front position light). 12. Front Fog Light NOTE: It is recommended that the front fog light bulb should be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Protect the bulb against abrasions or scratches and against liquids when lighted. Always wear eye protection when servicing the bulb. G270A03O nfhma-6. Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked. HNF5028 This halogen bulb contains gas under pressure and if impacted could shatter. Keep the bulb out of the reach of children and dispose of the used bulb with care. resulting in flying fragments. Turn the bulb on only when installing in a headlight. remove it from the bulb holder and install the new bulb. Back-up Light and Rear Side Marker Light 1. Open the trunk lid. 8:57 AM . Rear Turn Signal Light. HNF5029 2.

nfhma-6. 8:57 AM .6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 34 G270C01L-AAT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT 1. Install the new bulb. Loosen the mounting screws of the trunk lid trim with a phillips screwdriver and remove the trunk lid trim. remove it from the bulb holder and install the new bulb. Open the trunk lid.p65 34 4/28/2005. 6. To replace the rear combination light (stop/ tail light. HNF5031 2. HNF5030-A HNF5042 3. Remove the luggage compartment light cover on the rear package tray panel with a flathead screwdriver. To replace the rear combination light (backup light and stop/tail light). (1) Stop/tail light (2) Rear side marker light (3) Rear turn signal light 4. rear side marker light and rear turn signal light). remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise. 5.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 35 G270G01L-AAT INTERIOR LIGHT Screwdriver HNF5032 HNF5035 HNF5034 3. 1. Disconnect the power cord. 8:57 AM . Replace with a new bulb. Replace with a new bulb. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-head screwdriver.p65 35 4/28/2005. 2. nfhma-6. HTB284 4.

Remove the plastic cover with a flat-head screwdriver. Screwdriver G270G02NF G270G01NF 2. 8:57 AM . HNF5036 1. Remove the glove box illuminated light cover with a flat-head screwdriver.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 36 G270L01L-AAT G270K01L-AAT MAP LIGHT GLOVE BOX ILLUMINATED LIGHT 1. nfhma-6. Open the glove box.p65 36 4/28/2005. 2. Replace with a new bulb.

p65 37 4/28/2005. nfhma-6. Replace with a new bulb. Disconnect the power cord. HTB284 4. 8:57 AM .DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 37 HJM5039 3.

1 x 9.1 x 4.5d nfhma-6. 1 Headlight 2 3 4 5 6 7 Part Name Low beam High beam Front Turn Signal Light/Front Position Light Map Light Interior Light Front Fog Light Front Side Marker Light Front Door Edge Warning Light Wattage 55 55 28/8 10 10 27 8 8 Socket Type P x 26d P14.5d sv6-7.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 38 BULB WATTAGES G280A01NF-AAT G280A01NF-A No.5d w2.6d No.6 PGJ13 BAY15d w2. 8:57 AM .1 x 9.p65 38 4/28/2005.1 x 9.1 x 9. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Part Name Stop / Tail Light High Mounted Rear Stop Light Tail Light Luggage Compartment Light Rear Side Marker Light Rear Turn Signal Light Back-up Light License Plate Light Wattage 28/8 16 28/8 5 5 27 16 5 Socket Type BAY 15d w2.5s BAY15d w2. 6 BAY 15d BAY15s w2.5d BAY 15d sv6-7.

8:57 AM .p65 39 4/28/2005.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 39 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION G200C01NF-AAT Engine Compartment HNF4005 NOTE: Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle. refer to the fuse box label. nfhma-6.

IG1) Fusible Iink (ABS.2 20 B/UP 21 IGN COIL 22 ECU (IG1) 23 H/LP LO 24 ABS FUSE RATING 40A 20A 40A 40A 40A 40A 40A 30A 30A 30A 150A 100A 15A 20A 10A 10A 15A 15A 10A 20A 20A 15A 15A 15A 20A 20A 10A 10A 15A 15A 10A 20A 10A 20A 10A PROTECTED COMPONENTS ABS/ESC control module. 24. Fuse 21.p65 40 4/28/2005. Multipurpose check connector nfhma-6.1 ALT MDPS 1 HORN 2 TAIL 3 ECU 4 IG1 5 DRL 6 FR FOG 7 A/CON 8 F/PUMP 9 DIODE 10 ATM 11 STOP 12 H/LP LO RH FUSE 13 S/ROOF 14 H/LP WASHER 15 H/LP HI 16 ECU 17 SNSR. Ignition switch (IG2. 2. Pulse generator. Multipurpose check connector ABS/ESC control module. Vehicle speed sensor Ignition coils. Crankshaft/Camshaft position sensor. START) Engine control unit relay Power connector 1/2. RR HTD.1 19 SNSR. 33. Injectors Back up light switch.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 40 DESCRIPTION ABS. 30. Oil control valve.2 I/P B+1 RR HTD BLOWER FUSIBLE P/WDW LINK IGN. SMATRA A/C relay. DRL control module Front fog light relay A/C relay Fuel pump relay (Spare) ATM control relay Stop light relay (Spare) Sunroof control module Headlight washer motor Headlight relay (High) (Spare) Oxygen sensor. 31. Condenser PCM Headlight relay (Low) ABS/ESC control module. 8:57 AM . Fuel pump relay Mass air flow sensor.3 18 SNSR. 35 Defogger relay Blower relay Power window relay.22 Ignition switch (ACC. 32. Fuse 16 Start relay. 34. ABS. Multipurpose check connector Fuse 23. 1. Cooling fan relay. BLOWER) (Spare) Horn relay Tail light relay PCM (Spare) Siren relay.2 ECU RLY I/P B+2 IGN.1 ABS.

p65 41 4/28/2005. 8:57 AM .DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 41 G200E01NF-AAT Inner Panel HNF4003 nfhma-6.

Right : License light. Sunroof control module. High blower relay. Headlight relay. Glove box light Front fog light relay. Rear power outlet Digital clock. Right power window switch nfhma-6. Audio.p65 42 4/28/2005. Left : License light. 8:57 AM . Electronic chrome mirror ESC module. AQS and ambient sensor. Left headlight leveling actuator Wiper and washer A/C control module SRS control module. Rear combination light. Headlight Headlight washer relay. Right headlight leveling actuator DRL control module. Humidity sensor Cigarette lighter (Spare) Illumination lights. Left rear power window switch Power window main switch. A/T shift lock control module. Passenger's Airbag switch Front accessory socket. Power outside mirror and mirror folding Safety window module (Spare) A/T shift lock control module Power window main switch. Headlight.6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE 42 FUSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 FUSE RATING 15A 15A 10A 10A 25A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 25A 10A 15A 20A 10A 25A 15A 10A 20A 30A PROTECTED COMPONENTS (Spare) Seat warmer switch BCM(Body Control Module). Rear combination light.

Instrument cluster. Key solenoid A/C control module. A/C control module. 2 PROTECTED COMPONENTS Audio amp Door lock/unlock relay Hazard switch. Outside mirror and mirror folding motor Audio BCM(Body Control Module). Courtesy lights nfhma-6. 1 15A POWER CONNECTOR. Fuel filler door and trunk lid switch (Spare) Power seat manual switch Sport mode switch. Yaw rate sensor. Instrument cluster. Hazard relay Power seat manual switch(RHD) Instrument cluster Hazard switch BCM(Body Control Module).p65 43 4/28/2005.DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 6 43 FUSE RATING FUSE 20A 21 22 20A 10A 23 30A 24 10A 25 10A 26 10A 27 15A 28 10A 29 30 15A 15A 31 15A 32 33 15A 30A 34 10A 35 36 10A 15A POWER CONNECTOR. ESC switch (Spare) Burglar alarm relay (Spare) Rear fog light relay Trunk lid relay. Digital clock. 8:57 AM .

..... 7-3 7 nfhma-7.................EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS Emission Control System ........p65 1 3/9/2005................................................................ 7-2 Catalytic Converter ...... 10:29 AM 7 ...

nfhma-7. Exhaust Emission Control System The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance. When the engine is running. preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere. Canister Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. (The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station. the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases. Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV) The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM).p65 2 3/9/2005. the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve. (1) Crankcase emission control system (2) Evaporative emission control system (3) Exhaust emission control system In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems. when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling. There are three emission control systems which are as follows.7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS H010A01NF-AAT H010B01A-AAT Your Hyundai is equipped with an emission control system to meet all emission regulations.) H010D01A-AAT 3. the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine. turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again. Inside the crankcase. it is recommended that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual. H010C01S-AAT 2. the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. 1. which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system. o After dynamometer testing is completed. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. 10:29 AM . After the engine warmsup during ordinary driving. Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system) o To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing. Crankcase Emission Control System The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch. Evaporative Emission Control (Including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) System The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.

knocks. paper. o Maintain the engine in good operating condition. These materials might contact the hot catalytic converter and a fire might result. Running out of gasoline may cause the engine to misfire and result in damage to the catalytic converter. o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. o The vehicle should not be pushed or pulled to get started. o Remember that your Hyundai dealer is your best source of assistance. o Do not stop your Hyundai over any combustible material such as grass. Exhaust gases passing through the catalytic converter cause it to operate at a very high temperature. pings. Shut off the engine. o Avoid idling the engine for periods longer than 10 minutes. leaves or rags. or is hard to start. have your Hyundai dealer inspect and repair the problem as soon as possible.p65 3 3/9/2005. wait for at least one hour before touching the catalytic converter or any other part of the exhaust system. Extremely high catalytic converter temperatures can result from improper operation of the electrical. The introduction of large amounts of unburned gasoline into the exhaust may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and create a fire hazard. ignition or multiport electronic fuel injection. o If your engine stalls. o Do not touch the catalytic converter or any other part of the exhaust system while the catalytic converter is hot. 10:29 AM . hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 7 3 CATALYTIC CONVERTER H020A01A-AAT ! WARNING: ! WARNING: Catalytic Converter H020A01NF All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a monolith type three-way catalytic converter to reduce the carbon monoxide. nfhma-7. This risk may be reduced by observing the following: o Use unleaded fuel only. This may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and create a fire hazard.

....... 8-11 Spare Tire and Tools ...........................................................................CONSUMER INFORMATION................................................................... 8-10 When to Replace Tires .......... 8-4 Tire Terminology and Definitions ............................ 8-11 Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ................... 8-12 Consumer Information ............................ 8-9 Tire Balancing .................................................................................. 10:28 AM ................................. 8-8 Summer Tires .............................. 8-8 Tire Rotation ................................. 8-2 Recommended Inflation Pressures .....................p65 1 3/9/2005................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2 Engine Number .................... 8-10 Tire Maintenance ........ 8-9 Tire Traction ............................ 8-2 Tire Information ............... 8-8 Snow Tires ........................... 8-12 Reporting Safety Defects ....................................... REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................................................................................. 8-15 8 8 nfhma-8......................................................................................................... 8-8 Tire Chains .. 8-14 Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....... 8-4 Tire Sidewall Labeling .......... 8-3 Checking Tire Inflation Pressure ................................................ 8-6 All Season Tires ............................................

see the tire manufacturer's booklet included with your vehicle's Owner's Manual Literature Kit.8 CONSUMER INFORMATION. I010A01NF-A HNF6003 The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership. On the left top side of the instrument panel where it can be seen by looking down through the windshield.3L) I010B01NF The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing. (3.p65 2 3/9/2005. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service. 3. nfhma-8. On the lower side of the center pillar outer panel. 10:28 AM . etc. On the bulkhead between the engine and passenger compartments. 2.4L) TIRE INFORMATION The tires supplied on your new Hyundai are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) I010A01O-AAT ENGINE NUMBER I010B01A-AAT TIRES I020A02A-AAT (2. It can be found in three different places on your car: 1.

poor fuel economy or tire failure. Tire pressures should be checked at least monthly. the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight. uneven tread wear or tire failure. tire wear and stability under normal conditions.6 km) since starting up. poor handling. CAUTION: Always observe the following: I030A04NF-A ! These pressures were chosen to provide the most satisfactory combination of ride comfort.) nfhma-8. (After the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than 1 mile (1.p65 3 3/9/2005. 10:28 AM . Proper tire inflation pressures should be maintained for these reasons: o Check pressures when the tires are cold.CONSUMER INFORMATION. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 3 I030A01NF-AAT RECOMMENDED INFLATION PRESSURES I030A03NF-A WARNING: o Lower-than-recommended tire pressures cause uneven tread wear. ! I030A01NF-A Tire label located on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel gives the cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle with the original tire size. o Higher-than-recommended tire pressures can cause poor handling.

or if your tires have been damaged. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 4 o Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them."Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1. check the tire pressure of the spare tire.8 CONSUMER INFORMATION. replace them. nfhma-8. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall. Also. If the pressure is low. If you overfill the tire. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. How to Check Use a good quality gauge to check tire pressure. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. old tires can cause accidents. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. add air until you reach the recommended amount.6 km). 6 7 4 3 2 1 I030B04JM Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. no further adjustment is necessary. 10:28 AM . I035A01JM-AAT CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE Check your tires once a month or more. I030B01NF-AAT TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING 1 5. o Worn. Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.p65 4 3/9/2005. If your tread is badly worn. .

which include steel. 5. o Two-digit number (16): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. The symbol can be placed above. 3. It indicates the tire is in compliance with the U. o R: The "R" stands for radial. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire. o Two-digit number (60): This number. 2. the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction. 10:28 AM . 4. Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94V) o The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles.S. TIN (Tire Identification Number) for new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department of Transportation". Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Manufacturer or Brand name o Manufacturer or Brand name is shown. known as the aspect ratio. o V: Speed Rating.CONSUMER INFORMATION. o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's identification mark o 2nd two-digit code: Tire size o 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional) o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manufacture o Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. The ratings range from "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH). and others.p65 5 3/9/2005. the numbers 3105 means the 31st week of 2005. For example. The letter "R" means radial ply construction. polyester. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 5 1. nylon. below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. o Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. nfhma-8. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time. and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure. o Two digit number (94): This number is the tire's load index.

I030D01JM-AAT TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front Axle. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. traction and temperature resistance. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear. see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 8-13. Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 6 6. automatic transmission. measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.8 CONSUMER INFORMATION. When replacing the tires on the vehicle. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U. 10:28 AM . always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.p65 6 3/9/2005. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Some examples of optional accessories are. but without passengers and cargo. an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer. and air conditioning. nfhma-8. oil and coolant. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. production plant. 7.S. Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN). Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. For more information. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width. power seats. brand and date of production. Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire. Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire.

brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire. 10:28 AM . sometimes called "wear bars. a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. Rim: A metal support for a tire upon which the tire beads are seated. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.p65 7 3/9/2005. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard." that show across the tread of a tire when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. accessory weight. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg). Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall. UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. bears white lettering or bears manufacturer. temperature and treadwear. nfhma-8. and production options weight. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. The amount of grip provided. vehicle capacity weight. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 7 Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.CONSUMER INFORMATION. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

I040C01JM-AAT SUMMER TIRES Hyundai specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. I040B01JM-AAT ALL SEASON TIRES Hyundai specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round. accessory weight. poor handling may result. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your car is equipped with snow tires. Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. otherwise.p65 8 3/9/2005. they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. whichever is less. 10:28 AM . Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires an may be more appropriate in some areas. Hyundai recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels. including snowy and icy road conditions. Snow tires should be installed on nfhma-8. if necessary. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar . do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed. should be installed on the front wheels. I050A03Y-AAT TIRE CHAINS Tire chains. I040A01O-AAT all four wheels. All sea- SNOW TIRES If you equip your car with snow tires. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. and normal occupant weight and dividing by 2. Be sure that the chains are the proper size and that they are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: That load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight. or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall. son tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load. To minimize tire and chain wear. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs.8 CONSUMER INFORMATION.

! TIRE ROTATION WARNING: o Do not use the temporary spare tire for tire rotation. retighten the chains after driving 0. Use wire chains less than 15mm to prevent damage to the chain's connection. To prevent body damage. After rotating. have the car checked by a Hyundai dealer so the cause may be corrected.500 miles (12. nfhma-8. it should be rebalanced before being reinstalled on the car. or property damage.p65 9 3/9/2005. Whenever a tire is dismounted for repair. serious injury. If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly between rotations. If you have noise caused by chains contacting the body. drive at less than 20 mph (30 km/h). Don't use a tire chains to the vehicle which aluminium wheels are installed to keep the wheels. I060A02NF ! Tires should be rotated every 7. If it is on unavoidable circumstances. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 9 I060A02A-AAT o o o o o o WARNING: When driving on roads covered with snow or ice.3~0. Use the SAE "S" class or wire & plastic chains.CONSUMER INFORMATION. I070A01A-AAT TIRE BALANCING A tire that is out of balance may affect handling and tire wear. use a wire chains. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that could result in death. o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances. 10:28 AM . retighten the chain to avoid contact with the vehicle body.6 miles. The tires on your Hyundai were balanced before the car was delivered but may need balancing again during the years you own the car.000 km). adjust the tire pressures and be sure to check the wheel nut torque.

or property damage. never mix radial and bias ply tires on the same car. If you replace radial tires with biasply tires. slow down whenever there is rain. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. etc. (1.8 CONSUMER INFORMATION. serious injury. tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces.6 mm) Tread wear indicator HNF5015 The original tires on your car have tread wear indicators.6 mm). o Using tires and wheels of other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics that could cause death. 10:28 AM . steering control and traction. ! nfhma-8. WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES 0. including broken wheel studs. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 10 I080A01A-AAT I090A02A-AAT TIRE TRACTION Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires. The tire should be replaced when these appear as a solid bar across two or more grooves of the tread. The tread wear indicators appear when the tread depth is 0. they must be installed in sets of four.06 in.p65 10 3/9/2005. (1. If you change wheels. WARNING: o Driving on worn-out tires is dangerous! Worn-out tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness. Always replace your tires with those of the recommended size. When replacing tires. the new wheel's rim width and offset must meet Hyundai specification.06 in. o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai's dimensional specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle. snow or ice on the road. To reduce the possibility of losing control. The location of tread wear indicators is shown by the "TWI" or " " marks.

SHOP MANUAL A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from your authorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for professional technicians. make sure they are balanced. If you find a tire is worn unevenly. I100A01NF-A Your Hyundai is delivered with the following: Spare tire and wheel Wrench bar (1) Jack (2) Wheel nut wrench (3) Tool receptacle (4) nfhma-8.p65 11 3/9/2005. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. but is simple enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.CONSUMER INFORMATION. a tire shoud always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. When you have new tires installed. correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. have your dealer check the wheel alignment. 10:28 AM . Additionally. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 11 SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS I090B01JM-AAT I100A01NF-AAT I110A01A-AAT TIRE MAINTENANCE In addition to proper inflation.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Standards in addition to these grades. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Hyundai automobiles with information on uniform tire quality grading.000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (Original owner only). o New vehicle 120 Months/100. Department of Transportation. o Anti-Perforation Limited Warranty o Emission Defect Warranty .8 CONSUMER INFORMATION. Tire Quality Grading Department of Transportation quality grades . Treadwear . For example. 10:28 AM .1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. Your Hyundai dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. nfhma-8. service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits.000 Miles Limited Warranty. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use.Federal Vehicle o California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable) o Emission Performance Warranty Federal vehicle o Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.p65 12 3/9/2005.S. These quality grades are molded on the sidewall. a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 . NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook. however. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 12 WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE I120A02A-AAT CONSUMER INFORMATION I130A01A-AAT I130B04A-AAT o New vehicle 60 Months/60.

underinflation. B. from highest to lowest. or peak traction characteristics. C . ! Temperature A. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading . or excessive loading. C . WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. are AA. 109. and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. B. 10:28 AM . Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.CONSUMER INFORMATION. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life. hydroplaning. cornering. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. For example : Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A nfhma-8.Quality grades can be found on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and the maximum section width. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.p65 13 3/9/2005. and C. A. can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 13 Traction AA.The traction grades.The temperature grades are A (the highest). WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. B. B. and does not include acceleration. A. and C. either separately or in combination. Excessive speed.

S. Kentucky.O. New Mexico.8 CONSUMER INFORMATION. lowa. or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.p65 14 3/9/2005. Virginia.C. D. Washington. Rhode Island. Texas. Eastern Region 1100 Cranbury South River Road Jamesburg. However. Arizona. Tennessee. and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles. Ohio. Oklahoma. it may order a recall and remedy campaign. Central Region 1705 Sequoia Drive Aurora. you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-3274236 or write to: NHTSA. it may open an investigation. Department of Transportation. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. Indiana. Florida. Massachusetts. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 14 I130D03A-AAT REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Southern Region: Alabama. Maine. Louisiana. 10:28 AM . Western Region 10550 Talbert Avenue P. New Jersey. Missouri. 20590. you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle. you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. NJ 08831 (800) 633-5151 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death. West Virginia. Texas. GA 30168 (800) 633-5151 Central Region: Illinois. Minnesota. Mississippi. Washington. Nevada. Southern Region 270 Riverside Parkway. ldaho. please contact your nearest Hyundai Motor America Regional Office as listed below: Eastern Region : Connecticut. after reading this manual. Suite A Austell. Maryland. we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual. Delaware. Hawaii. South Carolina. Arkansas. New Hampshire. Colorado. North Dakota. Wisconsin. Oregon. New York. California 92728-0850 (800) 633-5151 I130C01A-AAT Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards. Vermont. Montana. "CAUTION" and "WARNING". To contact NHTSA. Illinois 60506 (800) 633-5151 Western Region: Alaska. Michigan. NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you. particularly the information under the headings "NOTE". Utah. however. nfhma-8. If NHTSA receives similar complaints. South Dakota.Box 20850 Fountain Valley. your dealer. Georgia. Wyoming. For your safety. Nebraska. U. North Carolina. Pennsylvanina. If. Kansas. California.

under the Code of Procedure of the entity you select. Box 20849. Written notice must be delivered (via certified mail) to Hyundai Motor America. shall be resolved by binding arbitration.hyundaiUSA. Judgment upon any award may be entered in any court having jurisdiction. CA 92728-0849. 10:28 AM . You may revoke this Arbitration Agreement by (1) written notice or (2) electronic notice. This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted under the Federal Arbitration Act. All other arbitration costs shall be borne by Hyundai Motor America. You are not responsible to pay any of the costs Hyundai incurs. The parties are waiving their right to seek remedies in court.O.p65 15 3/9/2005. This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall not deprive you of any remedies available to you under applicable law. Notice must be received within 90 days after you purchase your vehicle. sections 1-16. 10550 Talbert Avenue. nfhma-8. including claims related to the refund or partial refund of your vehicle's purchase price (excluding personal injury or product liability claims). Fountain Valley. Electronic notice must be submitted at the following website address: http:// warranty-arbitration. You will not be responsible for paying filing and hearing fees above $275.00.C.CONSUMER INFORMATION. including the right to a jury trial. P. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS 8 15 BINDING ARBITRATION I140A01A-AAT Any claim or dispute you may have related to your vehicle's warranty or the duties contemplated under the warranty.com. Binding arbitration shall be administered by and through the National Arbitration Forum (NAF) or the American Arbitration Association (AAA).S. Attn: Consumer Affairs. 9 U.

9-4 9 9 nfhma-9...................................................... 9-2 Engine .................. 8:58 AM ..................VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS Measurement .......................................................................p65 1 4/28/2005.... 9-3 Lubrication Chart ....................................

18 in.1 (1550) in.4 (2730) 61. 8:58 AM .9 (4800) 72.90 in.gal (14.5V) 3.4L MF68AH 110A (13.3L 189.3L J020A01NF-AAT POWER STEERING Type Wheel free play Rack stroke Oil pump type Rack and pinion 0 ~ 1.9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 2 J010A02NF-AAT J030A01NF-AAT MEASUREMENT ITEM Overall length Overall width Overall height Wheel base Wheel tread Front Rear 2.p65 2 4/28/2005.5V) 130A (13.7us. 67 liter) Rear brake type Parking brake nfhma-9.1 (1832) 58.6 (1565) 61. (0 ~ 30 mm) 5.(mm) TIRE Standard Option Spare P215/60R16 P225/50R17 T125/80D16 (Temporary) J040A01NF-GAT ELECTRICAL Item Battery 2.gal.4L/3.0 (1475) 107. (150 mm) Vane type Alternator J050A01NF-AAT BRAKE Type Front brake type Dual hydraulic with brake booster Ventilated disc Disc type Cable operated on rear wheel J060A01NF-AAT FUEL SYSTEM Fuel tank capacity 17.7 imp.

27 ~ 0.359) 1-3-4-2 3.342) 1-2-3-4-5-6 0.0 x 83.62 x 3.23 mm) 0.. (1.in.0 ..(mm) Displacement cu.9 (3.9(2.8) 203.p65 3 4/28/2005.33 mm) SK16PR-A11 0.(cc) Firing order Valve clearance (cold engine) Intake Exhaust Spark plug Spark plug gap Idle speed (rpm) Ignition timing (Base) 2.17 ~ 0.46 x 3.29 (92.1. (0. 8:58 AM .1 mm) 650 ± 100 BTDC 8° ± 5° 620 ± 100 BTDC 10° ± 5° IFR5G-11 nfhma-9. V-type DOHC 3.3L 6-Cyl.012 in. In-line DOHC 3.009 in. (0.043 in.01 ~ 0.039 ~ 0.006 ~ 0.4L 4-Cyl.VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 9 3 ENGINE J070A01NF-AAT ITEMS Engine Type Bore x Stroke in.81 (88 x 97) 143.

1. 8. SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.3) 3.66 (7..95 (0. 7. qts)(Imp. RANGE) SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE 0°F(-18°C)) HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III. ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE Transaxle Manual Automatic Coolant Manual Transaxle Automatic Transaxle Power steering Brake and clutch fluid Oil & Grease Standard Quantity (Us.67. 0.7) 2. 10.2) PSF-3 TYPE FLUID DOT 3 or DOT 4 Equivalent 0.9) 2. SL or ABOVE.54.3L : 6.p65 4 4/28/2005.5) SAE 5W-20.4L : 6.9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 4 LUBRICATION CHART J080A02NF-AAT Item Engine Oil API SJ. Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator 2. 2.54 (3.3) 3.02 (5.21.79.4L : 6.59. Liter) Drain and refill (With oil filter). 8:58 AM .9) 2.0 (1. 6.72.9) As required nfhma-9. SAE 5W-30 (ALL TEMP.4L : 4.86. 6.66 (5.87 (5.02.8) 3.24 (6. 4.4L : 8. 5. DIAMOND ATF SP III. qts.52 (9.3L : 11.78.3L : 8.

10:22 AM .p65 1 3/9/2005.INDEX 10 10 nfhma-10.

................................................................................. 6-21 Filter ............................p65 2 3/9/2005...... 10:22 AM ........ 1-76 Child Restraint System ........ 1-66 Clutch Pedal free-play ................................................................. 1-112........................................................................................................ 1-130 Ashtray ............. 1-122 Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ........................................ 6-14 Air Conditioning Care ................................. 1-3 C Care of Discs .............................................................................................. 1-31 Child-Protector Rear Door Lock .................. 2-12 Checking the brakes ........................................................................................................ 6-21 Switch .............................................. 6-20 Fluid ........................................................................................................................................... 6-24 Pedal free-play ........................................................................................ 1-36 Curtain airbag ....... 1-130 Catalytic Converter ....................................... 6-24 Practices ............... 1-75 Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ...................................... 6-23 nfhma-10.......................... 6-22 Operation ......................... 1-103 Antenna ............. 1-6 Cigarette Lighter .... 1-28 Installing a child restraint system with "Tether Anchorage" system ............................................................................ 1-47 Driver's and passenger's front airbag ............................................................................................................... 1-30 Securing a child restraint system with "ISOFIX" system ....... 1-67 Clock ...................... 1-37 Occupant classification system .............................. 1-103......................................... 6-20 Pedal clearance ........................................................................................ 1-45 Air Cleaner Filter ........................................................................ 1-115 Stereo radio operation (V490) .............................................. 6-27 Binding Arbitration ........................................................................................................ 1-42 Side impact airbag .................................................................................................................................... 1-118 Compact disc player operation (V490) .......... 1-79 B Battery .....................................................................................................10 INDEX 2 A Accessory Box ..................................................................................................... 2-14 Breaking-In your New Hyundai ............... 8-15 Brake Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...................................................... 1-125 Stereo radio operation (V480) ... 7-3 Center Console Compartment ................................................. 1-106 Automatic-Dimming Mirror with Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass Display and HomeLink® ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-68 Audio System Audio remote control switch ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-95 Compact disc player operation (V480) .....................

............................................................ 1-5 Drink Holder ...................... 1-18 Power driver's seat .... 6-5 Starting ........................................................................................................................................ 2-3 Compartment (2.................................... 1-62 Turn signal operation ................ 2-13 Emission Control System ...................................................................................................... 1-62 Lane change signal ....... 2-16 Winter driving ............................................................................... 4-5 Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ................................................................................................................. 6-2 Compartment (3.... 2-4 Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................................. 1-64 Front Seats Active headrests ............................................................................ 1-56 If the engine overheats ...........INDEX 10 3 Combination Light Auto Light ........................................................ 1-78 Defrosting/Defogging ........................................................3 V6) ..................................... 1-108 Fog Light Front ............. 1-17 Seat cushion height adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 4-3 Cruise Control ....................................................................................................................................... 4-2 Washing and waxing . 1-19 nfhma-10.................................................................................................... 1-63 Headlight flasher ......................................................................................................... 1-61 Consumer Information ........... 1-105 Door Central door locks .............................................. 1-92 Locking and unlocking front door with a key .................. 8-12 Cooling Fans ........................................ 1-63 Headlight switch ..................... 1-62 Parking light auto off .................................................... 3-4 Number ........ 1-16 Adjustable front seats ............................................... 7-2 Engine Before starting the engine .............................................................................. 2-15 Smooth cornering .............................................................................................. 8-2 Oil ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-93 D Day/night Inside Rearview Mirror .................................................................. 2-16 E Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System .... 6-8 Coolant temperature gauge ......... 1-97................................... 10:22 AM .............. 1-18 Seat warmer ...................................... 1-15 Adjusting seat forward and rearward .................................. 1-4 Front door warning light .................................................. 6-3 Coolant ....................................4 DOHC) ......................................... 1-6 Door locks .................................................................................................................................................. 1-17 Adjusting seatback angle ................................................................ 6-28 Corrosion protection Cleaning the interior ... 1-14... 1-68 Driving Economical driving ................................................................................ 1-14 Adjustable headrests .................................................................................................. 1-14...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................p65 3 3/9/2005............................................................................. 1-62 High-beam switch ... 2-2 F Fan Speed Control ............ 1-17....

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-13 Positions .................................. 6-30 Replacement ................................................. 1-98........................................................................................................................... 6-38 Light Bulbs Replacement ..............p65 4 3/9/2005............................... 9-4 nfhma-10.................................. 1-97................................................................. 6-31 Lubrication Chart ................................. 1-108 Bi-level heating .................................................................... 1-105 Fan speed control (Blower Control) ....................................................... 3-3 K Key ......... 1-110 Air intake control switch .............. 2-3 L Light Bulb Watages ............................. 1-65 Headlight Aiming adjustment ...............................10 INDEX 4 Fuel Capacity ................................. 1-102 Defrosting/Defogging ........................................ 6-4 Glove Box ...... 1-62 Heating and Cooling Control ............................ 6-25 G General Checks ................................................ 1-89 Horn ........................................................................................ 1-97 High-Mounted Rear Stop Light .................................................................... 1-92 I Ignition Switch .............................................. 1-74 H Hazard Warning System ................. 1-55 Recommendations ........................... 2-3 Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ..................................................... 6-31 Switch .............................................................................. 1-67 Interior Light ...................................................................... 1-73 Intermittent Wiper .................................. 1-50 Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ..................................... 1-96 Heating and Ventilation Air flow control ................................................. 1-108 Temperature control ................ 9-2 Gauge ................................................................................................................................ 1-87 Fuse Panel Description ....................... 1-101.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10:22 AM .............................. 1-3 If you lose your keys ........................ 6-39 Fuses ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-65 J Jump Starting ......................................................... 1-87 Hood Release ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 Fuel Filler Lid Remote release ................................................................................................

........................................................................................... 1-75 O Odometer .................................. 2-11 Power Outlets .......................................................................... 6-29 R Rear Seat Armrest ........................... 1-77 Outside rearview mirror heater ................................................................................................................................. 1-74 Speedometer ................. 5-7 Maintenance under severe usage conditions ........................................... 2-5 nfhma-10. 1-78 Homelink mirror ....................................................................... 1-67 Power Steering Fluid Level ....................................................................... 1-25 Care of seat belts ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Service requirements ........ 1-77 P Parking Brake ...................... 6-11 Spectacle Case ......................................................................................... 8-14 S Seat Front ................................. 5-2 Mirrors Day/night inside rearview .................................................................................................. 1-79 Outside rearview ...... 1-20 Warning ..................................... 1-57 Starting Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1-14 Rear ........................................................................ 1-70 Shopping Bag Holder ............................................................................... 1-26 Seatback Pocket .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-24 Adjusting your seat belt .............................. 1-66 Reporting Safety Defects .............................................. 1-19 Rear seatback safety lock .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................p65 5 3/9/2005.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-33 Precautions ............ 1-69 Spark Plugs ...................................................................... 1-21 Rear seat center 3-point system with combination locking retractor ........................................................................................................................ 1-19 Seat Belts 3-Point system ........ 1-57 Outside Rearview Mirror ............... 1-78 Multi Box ............................................. 1-92 Folding rear seatbacks .............. 1-85 Power Adjustable Pedals .......................................................INDEX 10 5 M Maintenance Intervals Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ....................................... 1-22 Pre-tensioner seat belt .................. 1-20 Rear Window Defroster Switch .............. 5-6 Scheduled maintenance ......... 10:22 AM .......................................................................................

..................................................................................................... 8-4 If you have a flat tire ........................................................................... 6-17 Trip Computer ........................... 8-4 Snow tires .............................. 8-12 Windows Power ................................... 8-10 Towing A trailer (or vehicle) ..................................................... 8-11 Pressure .................................... 1-56 Theft-Alarm System ................................................................................. 2-19 Emergency ....................................... 8-9 Chains .................. 1-65 Mist wiper operation ................................................................................................................................................... 9-1 W Warning and Indicator Lights ......................... 3-6 Information ................... 2-5 Manual transaxle oil checking .................................................... 3-6 Checking the inflation pressure .............. 1-70 T Tachometer .............................. 1-52 Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ....... 1-65 Windshield washer operation ....................................................................................... 1-8 Tires All season tires .................................... 8-6 Traction .................................................... 1-91 Stereo Sound System ...... 8-2 Vehicle Load Limit ... 3-13 If your vehicle must be towed .................... 2-22 Vehicle Specifications ................................................................................................... 8-9 Sidewall labeling ..................... 2-8 Automatic transaxle fluid checking .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-8 Balancing ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-64 Windshield Wiper Blades ..................................................... 1-113 Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 8-8 Spare tire ........................................................................... 6-15 nfhma-10...................................................................................... 1-91 Tilt type ................................................................. 6-23 Tilt and telescopic type ..................................................................................................... 8-8 Terminology and definitions .................................................................................. 1-85 V Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 8-8 Changing a flat tire ...................................... 1-90 Sunroof ......................................................................10 INDEX 6 Steering Wheel Free-play ........................................................................... 1-11 Windshield Wiper and Washer ................................................................................. 8-10 Rotation . 6-18 Manual ..........................................p65 6 3/9/2005............................................................ 1-64 Intermittent wiper operation .................... 1-57 Trunk Lid ...................................................................................................................... 8-3 Replacement ..................................... 1-58 Trip Odometer ................................ 3-11 Transaxle Automatic ............................... 8-2 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5 Summer tires .... 10:22 AM .....................................................